Skip to main content

Full text of "Swahili Exercises : compiled for the Universities' Mission to Central Africa"

See other formats


!    - 


fornia 
nal 

y 


UCSB  LIBRARY 


1*1 

•Mil  ^ 
*, 


/ 


H, 


A.   M. 


/ 

_  • 

/  ' 


SWAHILI  EXERCISES 

COMPILED  FOR 

THE  UNIVERSITIES'   MISSION  TO 
CENTRAL  AFRICA, 


BT 

EDWARD    STEERE,   LL.D,, 

MISSIONARY    BISHOP  FOR  CENTRAL  AFRICA* 

"Soli  Deo  gloria." 


TWELFTH    THOUSAND 


SOCIETY  FOR  PROMOTING  CHRISTIAN  KNOWLEDGE, 
LONDON  :  68,  HAYMARKET,  S.W. 


ADVERTISEMENT. 

THIS  little  book  is  intended  as  a  practical  guide  for  tbose 
who  wish  to  speak  Swahili  correctly.  It  does  not  pretend 
to  teach  them  to  speak  the  language,  but  to  guide  them  to 
the  use  of  correct  forms,  and  to  draw  their  attention  to 
niceties  of  expression,  which  the  untutored  ear  would  pro- 
bably miss.  The  only  way  to  learn  to  speak  a  language  is 
by  listening  to,  and  talking  with,  natives.  Without  this  no 
book  in  the  world  can  be  of  much  use.  But  a  listener  will 
soon  meet  with  forms  and  phrases  which  want  explanation. 
It  is  then  that  he  can  make  good  use  of  a  book.  Thus, 
a  listener  would  soon  find  that  the  first  syllables  of  Swahili 
words  were  often  changing,  but  it  would  be  very  difficult  for 
him  without  any  guide  to  discover  what  rules  the  changes 
followed. 

The  first  syllables  of  Swahili  words  depend  almost  always 
upon  some  Substantive  expressed  or  understood.  But  if  a 
learner  is  plunged  at  once  into  a  chaos  of  ten  or  twelve  or 
fifteen  or  sixteen  different  forms  with  various  effects  upon  the 
other  parts  of  speech,  he  is  apt  to  give  up  the  attempt  to 
master  what  seems  so  much  more  difficult  than  it  really  is. 


IV  ADVERTISEMENT. 

In  the  following  pages  three  of  the  most  useful  forms  of 
Substantives  are  first  taken,  and  by  working  through  all  the 
ordinary  grammar  of  the  language  with  these  three  forms 
only,  the  learner  will  find  that  his  mind  is  getting  used  to 
the  peculiarities  of  this  class  of  languages,  and  the  real 
simplicity  of  their  construction  will  become  more  and  more 
evident 

It  is  not  intended  to  give  instances  here  of  every  form  of 
word  or  sentence.  All  the  more  important  are  given  ;  what 
remain  are  rarely  used,  or  belong  to  some  specialty  of 
thought  or  expression,  and  can  be  very  soon  mastered 
when  they  are  really  wanted.  The  compiler  has  been 
himself  surprised  to  find  how  copious  and  expressive  the 
Swahili  language  is,  and  he  will  be  glad  if  these  exercises 
help  to  vindicate  its  honour. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


SUBSTANTIVES. 
M-  AND  Ki-  CLASSES,  i — 40. 

List  of  regular  Substantives,  i — 3. 

Substantives  with  vowel  roots,  id. 

Adjectives  with  vowel  roots,  3. 
Plurals,  I,  1 6. 
Possessive  case,  19. 
Locative  case,  59. 
Agreement  of  Adjectives,  3. 

Vowel  Adjectives,  1 6,  17, 

Numerals,  4. 
Pronouns  7,  8. 

Demonstratives,  5 — 7. 

Personal  Pronouns,  J. 
Verbal  Prefixes,  8. 

Interrogatives,  9. 

Objective  prefixes,  14. 

Possessive  Pronouns,  aa 

Him  and  His,  20. 

Quasi  Pronouns,  all,  having  itself,  fy  #«//, 

Relatives,  22 — 2$. 

Which?  9. 

THE  N-  CLASS,  48 — 55. 

List  of  N-  Substantives,  49. 
Euphonic  changes,  48,  53. 
Adjectives,  51. 

Numerals,  52. 
Pronouns,  52 — 54« 

Demonstratives,  53. 

Pronominal  prefixes,  52i  $Jr 

Which  ?  53. 

Possessives,  53. 

Quasi  Pronouns,  53, 

Relatives,  54. 


VI  CONTENTS. 

THE  MA-  CLASS,  42 — 48,  see  65. 

List  of  Ma-  Substantives,  42 — 43 
.    Adjectives,  43 — 44. 
Pronouns,  45 — 46. 

Demonstratives,  44. 

Pronominal  prefixes,  45,  48. 

Which  ?  44. 

Possessives,  46. 

Quasi  Pronouns,  46. 

Relatives,  47. 

THE  U-  CLASS,  55 — 59. 

List  of  U-  Substantives,  56. 
Plurals,  55—57. 
Adjectives,  57. 

Numerals,  57. 
Pronouns,  57. 

Demonstratives,  58. 

Pronominal  prefixes,  58, 

Which  ?  58. 

Relatives,  58. 

MAHALI,  place,  40. 

INFINITIVES  of  Verbs  as  Substantive^  41. 

NAMES  OF  ANIMALS,  64,  65. 

THE  -Ni  CASE,  59. 

ADJECTIVES. 

List  of  regular  Adjectives,  3. 

List  of  vowel  Adjectives,  16,  17. 

Indeclinable  Adjectives,  60. 

Compound  Adjectives,  61. 

Adjectival  Verbs,  62,  63. 

Comparison  of  Adjectives,  66,  67. 

Agreement  of  Adjectives,  3,  16,  17,  40,  43,  51,  57,  Gl,  64. 

NUMERALS,  4, 

Ordinal  numbers,  6 1. 

Agreement  of  numerals,  4,  5,  43,  52,  57,  6$, 


CONTENTS.  Vii 

PRONOUNS. 

Demonstratives,  5,  41,  44,  53,  57,  64. 

Personal  Pronouns,  7,  45,  52,  57. 

Subjective  and  Objective  prefixes,  8,  14,  30,  40,  45,  48,  52,  55, 

58,  64. 

Interrogatives,  9,  41,  44,  53,  58. 

Quasi  Pronouns,  all,  having,  itself,  by  itself,  21,  41,  46,  53,  58, 
Possessive  Pronouns,  20,  41,  46,  53,  58. 
Relatives,  22—25,  54.  69»  72- 

Relative  with  negative,  33. 

Forming  quasi  Adjectives,  62. 

In  the  comparison  of  Adjectives,  67. 

Agreement  of  Relatives,  23,  41,  47,  54,  58. 

Relatives  of  time  and  place,  24,  25,  41,  69, 

Relative  without  note  of  time,  64. 

THE  VERB. 

List  of  Verbs,  8,  n. 

List  of  irregular  Verbs,  70,  71. 

List  of  Adjectival  Verbs,  62,  63. 

Infinitive,  10,  41. 

Indicative  Tenses,  affirmative,  10. 

Present  indefinite,  18. 

Present  imperfect,  10. 

Future,  10. 

Future  of  continuing  action,  73 

Present  Perfect,  8,  10,  62. 

Past,  10,  18,  73. 

Past  Imperfect,  73. 

Pluperfect,  73. 

Narrative  tense,  27. 

Participial  tense,  27. 
Indicative,  negative,  30. 

Present,  30. 

Past,  31. 

Not  yet  tense,  31. 

Future,  32. 

Negative  with  rektives,  33, 

Negative  participial,  34. 
Imperative  affirmative,  25,  26, 


eill  CONTENTS. 

THE  VERB  (continue^)— 
Imperative  negative,  33. 
Subjunctive  affirmative,  25,  26. 

„  negative,  33. 

Conditional  affirmative,  29. 

„          negative,  32. 
Compound  tenses,  73. 

Kwisha,  as  an  auxiliary,  73. 
Participles,  73. 

PASSIVE  VOICE,  35,  74,  76. 
To  BE,  7,  67—69,  73. 

See  also  7,  9,  30,  34,  45,  52,  57,  67—69. 
To  HAVE,  72,  73. 
DERIVATIVE  VERBS,  74 — 80. 

Applied  or  Prepositional  form,  74, 
With  mbali,  77. 
To  denote  use  or  purpose,  77. 
Reciprocal  form,  78. 
Reflective,  15. 
i      Neuter  form,  78. 

Causative  form,  79. 

Verbs  in-*,  -i,  and  «-,  26,  30,  35,  76,  78,  70 
Verbs  in  -oa  and  ua,  35,  75. 

ADVERBS,  36. 

List  of  Adverbs,  36. 
Sana,  36,  67. 
Awb,  32. 
Mbali,  77. 

PREPOSITIONS,  37. 

Prepositional  form  of  Verb,  37,  74, 
Compound  Prepositions,  38. 
Of,  19,  37,  4i,  46,  53,  58. 
By  after  Passive  Verb,  35. 

CONJUNCTIONS,  26,  27,  38,  39. 
QUESTIONS,  9,  13,  24,  25. 


SWAHILI    EXERCISES. 


PLURAL  OF  SUBSTANTIVES. 

Ki-  and  M-  Classes. — Substantives  beginning  with  ki- 
are  made  plural  by  changing  ki-  into  vi-. 

Kitu,*  a  thing.  Vitu,  things. 

Substantives  beginning  with  m-  are  made  plural  in  different 
ways,  according  to  whether  they  are  the  names  of  persons, 
or  living  beings  of  any  kind,  or  are  the  names  of  trees,  or 
things  in  general. 

If  they  denote  living  beings,  substantives  in  m-  are  made 
plural  by  changing  m-  into  wa-. 

Mtu,  a  person.  Watu,  people. 

If  they  do  not  denote  living  beings,  substantives  in  in- 
are  made  plural  by  changing  m-  into  mi-. 

Mti,  a  tree,  wood.  Miti,  trees. 

Mkono,  an  arm.  Mikono,  arms. 

What  are  the  plurals  of — 

Kitendo,  an  action.  Kibofu,  a  bladder. 

M  shale,  an  arrow.  Kipofu,  a  blind  person, 

Kikapo,  a  matting  bag,  Mfupa,  a  bone. 

Mbuyu,  a  baobab  tree.  Kitabu,  a  book. 

Kitanda,  a  bedstead.  Mpaka,  a  boundary. 

*  In  pronouncing  Swahili,  the  vowels  are  pronounced  as  the  vowels 
in  Italian ;  the  consonants  are  pronounced  much  like  those  in  English, 
except  ght  which  represents  the  Arabic  ghain,  and  is  pronounced  as  a 
strong  guttural. 

The  accent  is  always  on  the  penultimate  syllable. 


SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 


Mzigo,  a  burden. 
Kifungo,  a  button. 
Mzinga,  a  cannon. 
Mtumbwi,  a  canoe. 
Msafara,  a  caravan* 
Mkufu,  a  chain. 
Kiti,  a  chair. 
Mfalme,  a  thief,  a  king, 
Mtoto,  a  child. 
Kidevu,  the  chin. 
Mnazi,  a  cocoa-nut  tree, 
Mbuni,  a  coffee  plant. 
Kitana,  a  comb. 
Mpishi,  a  cook. 
Kizibo,  a  cork. 
Kikombe,  a  cup. 
Mtende,  a  date  tree. 
Kiziwi,  a  deaf  person. 
Mlango,  a  door. 
Mlevi,  a  drunkard. 
Mzungu,  a  Eitropean. 
Kidole,  a  finger. 
Mvuvi,  ajishcrrnan, 
Kiroboto,  a  flea. 
Mguu,  the  foot. 
Kivuko,  a  ford. 
Mgeni,  a  foreigner, 
Mchezo,  a  game. 
Mlinzi,  a  guard. 
Mkono,  the  hand. 
Kipini,  a  handle. 
Kitwa,  the  head. 
Mchunga,  a  herdsman, 
Kiliuia,  a  hill. 
Kiboko,  a  hippopotamus. 
Kibanda,  a  hut.    ' 
Mkaliniani,  an  interpreter. 
Kisiwa,  an  island, 
Kisu,  a  knifr. 
Kifuniko,  a  lid. 
Mstari,  a  line. 
Mdomo,  a  lip. 
Mjusi,  a  lizard. 
Mkate,  a  loaf. 
Kioo,  a  lookin«-glast% 
Kitanzi,  a  loop. 
Mchiro,  a  maiigousle. 


MHngote,  a  mast. 
Mganga,  a  medicine-man, 
Msiba,  a  misfortune. 
Kinu,  a  wooden  mortar  for 

cleaning  corn. 
Mlima,  a  mountain. 
Kinwa,  the  mouth. 
Mlezi,  a  nurse. 
Kiapo,  an  oath. 
Mzee,  an  old  person. 
Kitunguu,  an  onion. 
Msimamizi,  an  overlooker. 
Mchikichi,  a  palm-oil  tree. 
Kipande,  apiece. 
Mto,  a  pillow. 
Kipele,  a  pimple. 
Mti,  a  pole,  a  tree. 
Mpagazi,  a  caravan  porttr. 
Kiazi,  a  sweet  potato. 
Kigai,  a  potsherd. 
Xifuko,  a  pune. 
Kitambaa,  a  rag. 
Kidaka,  a  recess. 
Kifaru,  a  rhinoceros. 
Mto,  a  river. 
Mtoro,  a  runaway. 
Mtai,  a  scratch. 
Mtumishi,  a  servant. 
Kivuli,  a  shadoiv. 
Xiatu,  a  shoe  (sandal). 
Mgonjwa,  a  sick  person, 
Mjinga,  a  simpleton. 
Mtumwa,  a  slave. 
Mtwana,  a  slave  boy. 
Kijakazi,  a  slave  girl. 
Mjakazi,  a  slave  woman. 
Mjoli,  a  follow  slave. 
Mkeka,  a  sleeping  mat. 
Kidonda,  a  sore. 
M  kuke,  a  spear. 
Mtambo,  a  metal  spring. 
Mkia,  a  tail. 
Kijiko,  a  teaspoon. 
Kiko,  a  tobacco pipt. 
Mji,  a  town. 
Mtego,  a  trap. 
Kilcmba,  a  turban. 


AGREEMENT  OF   ADJECTIVES.  3 

Mzabibu,  a  vine.  Mjeledi,  a  whip. 

Ktsibau,  a  waistcoat..  Mke,  a  -wife. 

Mtungi,  a  -water-jar.  Mchawi,  a  wizard. 

Kisima,  a  well.  Kijana,  a  youth, 

The  English  words  are  in  alphabetical  order. 
MUUNGU,  GOD,  and  Miume,  an  Apostle,  make  their  plurals 
irregularly — miungu,  gods,  Mitumet  Apostles. 


AGREEMENT  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

Adjectives  are  made  to  agree  with  their  substantives  by 
adopting  the  same  prefix. 

Mtu  mrefu,  a  tall  titan.  Kisu  kirefu,  a  long  knife, 

Watu  warefu,  tall  people.  Visu  virefu,  long  knives. 
Miti  mirefu,  (all  trees. 

The  adjective  is  always  placed  after  its  substantive. 

LIST  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

The  root  only  is  here  given,  to  which  the  proper  prefix 
must  be  in  each  case  attached. 

Bad,  — baya.  Little,  — dogo. 

Bare,  only,  — tupu.  Long,  — refu. 

Beautiful,  — zuri.  New,  — pya. 

Bitter,  — chungu.  Old  (worn  out),  — kukuu. 

Broad,  — pana.  Open,  — wazi. 

Chief,  great,  — kuu.  Raw,  — bichi. 

Dry,  — kavu.  Ripe,  — bivu. 

Empty,  — tupu.  Rotten,  — bovu. 

Female,  — ke.  Savage,  — kali. 

fierce,  — kali.  Sharp,  — kali. 

Fine,  — zuri.  Short,  — fupL 

Foreign,  — geni.  Sound,  — zirna. 

Great,  large,  — kub'-va.  Sweet,  — tarnu. 

Hard,  — gumu.  Thick,  — nene. 

Heavy,  — zito.  Unripe,  — bichi. 

Idle,  — vivu.  Whole,  — zima, 

Jealous,  — wivu.  Wide,  — pana. 

The  interrogative,  How  many  ?  -ngapi  ?  is  treated  as  an 
adjective. 


j  SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 

Watu  wangapi  ?    How  many  people  t 
Viti  vingapi  ?    How  many  chairs  ? 
Miti  mingapi  ?    How  many  trees  t 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

A  bad  action.  A  long  arrow.  Empty  matting  bags.  Thick  baobaV 
trees.  A  broad  bedstead.  A  hard  bone.  An  old  book.  Heavy  bur- 
dens. A  beautiful  button.  Large  cannons.  A  short  canoe.  Foreign 
caravans.  A  thick  chain.  A  new  chair.  Great  chiefs.  A  beautiful 
child.  Long  chins.  A  fine  coffee  plant.  Little  combs.  An  idle  cook. 
Hard  corks.  An  empty  cup.  Short  date  trees.  Wide  doors.  A  fierce 
drunkard.  Female  Europeans.  A  thick  finger.  Jealous  fishermen. 
Bare  feet.  A  wide  ford.  Idle  foreigners.  A  fine  game.  Fierce 
guards.  A  sound  hand.  Long  handles.  A  dry  head.  Bad  herdsmen. 
A  great  hill.  A  dry  hut.  A  bad  interpreter.  Large  islands.  A  sharp 
knife.  Heavy  lids.  A  long  line.  Dry  lips.  Large  lizards.  A  sweet 
loaf.  New  looking-glasses.  A  long  loop.  Female  mangoustes.  A 
short  mast.  A  foreign  medicine  man.  Heavy  misfortunes.  A  new 
mortar.  Great  mountains.  Wide  mouths.  Jealous  nurses.  A  bitter 
oath.  Fine  old  people.  A  rotten  onion.  Sharp  overlookers.  Little 
palm-oil  trees.  Short  pieces.  A  hard  pillow.  Long  poles.  An  idle 
porter.  Raw  sweet  potatoes.  A  sharp  potsherd.  Empty  purses.  An 
old  rag.  Wide  recesses.  Foreign  simpletons.  A  new  slave.  Idle  slave 
women.  Bad  slave  boys.  A  jealous  fellow-slave.  Open  sores.  A 
heavy  spear.  Wide  rivers.  A  new  shoe.  Bad  servants.  A  long 
shadow.  Old  sleeping  mats.  A  small  tea-spoon.  Long  tails.  A  short 
tobacco-pipe.  Large  towns.  An  empty  trap.  Beautiful  turbans.  A 
fine  vine.  Long  waistcoats.  An'empty  water-jar.  Heavy  whips.  A 
jealous  wife.  Large  unripe  sweet  potatoes.  How  many  burdens? 
How  many  huts  ?  How  many  loaves  ?  How  many  cooks  ?  How 
many  mountains  ?  How  many  simpletons  ?  How  many  towns  ?  How 
many  pieces?  How  many  water-jars  ?  How  many  knives? 

NUMBERS. 

The  Swahili  numbers  are  treated  as  adjectives,  and  mad* 
to  agree  with  their  substantives  in  the  same  way. 

The  words  for  six,  seven,  nine,  and  ten,  are  irregular, 
being  used  without  any  prefix. 

The  root  forms  of  the  numbers  are — 

1  — moja  6  Sita. 

2  — will.  7  Saba. 

3  — tatu.  8  — nane. 

4  — nne.  9  Kenda,  or  Tissa,  er  Tissi* 

5  — tano.  10  Kumi. 


,  DEMONSTRATIVES,  5 

Mtu  mmoja,  one  man.  Watu  wanane,  eight  people. 

Kitu  kimoja,  one  thing*  Miti  sita,  six  trees. 

Miti  mitatu,  three  trees.  Vitu  kenda,  nine  things. 

Vitu  vinne,  four  things.  Watu  kumi,  ten  men. 

Where  an  adjective  is  joined  with  the  substantive  as  well 
as  a  numeral,  they  are  usually  placed  in  exactly  the  reverse 
of  the  English  order. 

Watu  wabaya  wawili,  two  bad  men 
Miti  mizuri  mitatu,  three  fine  trees. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

One  man.  One  turban.  One  knife.  One  tree.  One  purse.  One 
slave.  One  river.  One  water-jar.  Two  burdens.  Three  buttons. 
Four  cannons.  Five  canoes.  Six  caravans.  Seven  chains.  Eight 
chairs.  Nine  chiefs.  Ten  children.  One  small  cocoa-nut  tree.  Two 
large  coffee  plants.  Three  long  combs.  Four  idle  cooks.  Five  bad 
corks.  Six  small  cups.  Seven  large  date  trees.  Nine  wide  doors. 
Ten  short  Europeans.  One  thick  ringer.  Three  broad  feet.  Four 
long  handles.  Five  great  hills.  Seven  new  huts.  Eight  bad  inter- 
preters. Nine  sharp  knives.  Ten  long  lines.  One  savage  mangouste. 

DEMONSTRATIVES. 

This  and  That. — The  two  demonstratives  in  Swahili 
answering  to  this  and  that  denote  strictly  what  is  near 
and  what  is  at  a  distance.  Where  this  and  that  are  used 
in  English  to  distinguish  two  things  which  are  both  near, 
the  same  word  must  be  used  for  both  in  Swahili.  The 
second  demonstrative  answers  to  yonder,  or  very  closely  to 
the  north  of  England  word,  yon. 

All  the  demonstratives  pointing  to  things  near  begin 
with  h-,  and  all  those  pointing  to  things  at  a  distance  end 
with  -le. 

Mtu  huyu,  this  man.  Miti  hii,  these  trees* 

Mtu  yule,  that  man.  Miti  ile,  those  trees. 

Watu  hawa,  these  men*  Kitu  hiki,  this  thing. 

Watu  wale,  tJiose  men.  Kitu  kile,  that  thing, 

Mti  huu,  this  tree.  Vitu  hivi,  these  things. 

Mti  ute,  that  tree.  Vitu  vile,  those  things. 

The  second  syllable  of  the  demonstrative  this  is  the 
first  of  the  demonstrative  that.  Particular  care  must  be 


6  SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 

taken  to  remember  this  syllable,  as  it  is  the  foundation  of 
all  the  forms  of  pronouns. 

In  nouns  of  the  Mtu  class,  it  is  -yu-  in  the  singular  and 

-wa-  in  the  plural. 
sjn  nouns  of  the  Mti  class,  it  is  -//-  in  the  singular  and  -/- 

in  the  plural 
In  nouns  of  the  Ki-  class,  it  is  -ki-  in  the  singular  and 

-vi-  in  the  plural. 

The  demonstrative  this  is  made  by  prefixing  h  and  the 
root  vowel,  h-u-yu,  h  a-wa,  ti-u-u,  h-i-i,  h-i-ki,  h-i-vi. 

The  demonstrative  that,  or  yonder,  is  made  by  adding 
-/<?,  yu-le,  wa-le,  u-le,  i-let  ki-Ie,  vi-le. 

If  an  adjective  is  joined  with  the  substantive  the  demon- 
strative follows  both. 

Mtu  mbaya  huyu,  this  bad  man. 
Miti  mibovu  hii,  these  rotten  trees. 
Vitu  vidogo  hivi,  these  little  things. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

This  fine  action.  Yonder  long  arrows.  This  thick  baobab  tret. 
Those  bedsteads.  This  bladder.  These  hard  bones.  This  large  book. 
Tliis  boundary.  Yonder  heavy  burdens.  These  buttons.  Those  large 
cannons.  This  caravan.  These  chains.  Yonder  chair.  Those  chiefs. 
These  children.  This  cocoa-nut  tree.  That  coffee  plant.  These  combs. 
This  cook.  This  cork.  Yonder  cup.  Yonder  date  tree.  These  doors. 
This  drunkard.  These  Europeans.  This  ringer.  Those  fishermen. 
Those  feet  This  foot.  This  ford.  This  foreigner.  These  games. 
These  guards.  These  hands.  These  handles.  That  herdsman.  This 
Lltle  hill.  Those  small  huts.  Those  interpreters.  Those  large  islands. 
That  long  knife.  This  lid.  These  thick  lines.  These  thick  lips. 
Those  beautiful  lizards.  Those  sweet  loaves.  That  tall  mast.  That 
great  mountain.  These  old  people.  Those  raw  onions.  This  pimple. 
That  pole.  Those  idle  porters.  These  small  sweet  potatoes.  That 
sharp  potsherd.  Those  old  rags.  That  simpleton.  These  idle  slaves. 
That  short  heavy  spear.  That  old  shoe.  Those  servants.  Those  new 
sleeping  mats.  This  tobacco  pipe.  These  traps.  Those  fine  turbans. 
These  fine  waistcoats.  These  new  water-jars.  This  well.  These 
wizards. 

When  the  demonstrative  precedes  the  adjective,  it  must 
be  very  often  translated  by  the  introduction,  in  the  English, 
of  the  verb  to  be. 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.  7 

Miti  hii  mirefu,  these  poles  art  long. 
Kisu  hiki  kikali,  this  knife  is  sharp* 
Mtu  huyu  mbaya,  this  man  is  baa. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

These  people  are  fierce.  These  mountains  are  large.  These  slaves 
are  idle.  Yonder  trees  are  small.  That  man  is  short.  This  speir  is 
heavy.  These  Europeans  are  jealous. 

PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.  \ 

The  full  forms  of  the  personal  pronouns  in  Swahili  are — 

Mimi,"/.  Sisi,  we, 

Wewe,  thou  or  you.  Wmyi,ycu. 

Yeye,  he  or  she.  Wao,  they. 

These  forms  can  refer  only  to  persons  or  living  beings. 
For  things  the  demonstrative  pronouns  are  used. 

The  second  person  is  always  used  in  the  singular  when 
one  person  only  is  addressed. 

When  a  pronoun  is  followed  by  an  adjective  it  implies 
the  appropriate  form  of  the  verb  to  be. 

Mimi  mkubwa,  I  am  great.  Hii  mitamu,  they  (these)  are  sweet, 

Wewe  mdogo,  you  are  small.          He  mirefu,  they  (those)  are  tall. 

In  order  to  agree  with  the  plural  personal  pronouns,  sisi, 
nt'nyi,  and  wao,  adjectives  prefix  wa-  as  if  to  agree  with 
watu. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

I  am  fierce.  You  are  short.  He  is  large.  They  are  small.  We 
are  heavy.  You  [pi.]  are  dry.  They  [shoes]  are  new.  It  [rag]  is  old. 
They  [huts]  are  old.  It  [chain]  is  thick.  They  [slaves]  are  idle.  They 
[sweet  potatoes]  are  ripe.  He  is  little.  He  is  savage.  She  is  foreign. 
I  am  jealous.  You  [pi.]  are  jealous.  They  [people]  are  beautiful.  It 
[water-jar]  is  empty.  He  is  short.  You  are  large.  You  [pi.]  are  large. 

%*  The  words  in  brackets  are  not  to  be  translated. 

The  personal  pronouns  are.  generally  represented  by  a 
prefix  attached  to  the  verb.  These  prefixes  may  be  used 
alone  to  express  the  present  tense  of  the  verb  to  be. 

They  are  the  same  as  the  second  syllable  of  the  demon- 
strative this  (see  p.  5). 


8  SWAIIILI  EXERCISES. 

Ni,  I  am.  Tu,  -we  are. 

U,  you  are.  'M,  you  ars. 

Yu,  he  or  she  is.  VVa,  they  are. 

U  or  Ki,  iV  rV.  I  0r  Vi,  they  are. 

The  full  forms  of  the  personal  pronouns  may  be  used  to 

give  particular  emphasis. 

Mimi  ni  mzuri,  as  for  me  1  am  beautiful. 
Wewe  u  mvivu,  you  at  all  events  are  idle. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

This  tree  is  little.  That  date  tree  is  short.  This  old  man  is  great. 
We  are  dry.  Those  poles  are  long.  That  little  man  is  fierce.  That 
knife  is  sharp.  You  are  idle.  He  is  idle.  He  is  little.  She  is  beau- 
tiful. She  is  short.  It  [the  knife]  is  heavy.  It  [the  knife]  U  long 
It  [the  sweet  potato]  is  raw.  They  [the  sweet  potatoes]  are  ripe. 
They  [the  old  people]  are  beautiful.  You  are  short.  It  [the  hut]  is  old. 
They  [the  rags]  are  old.  They  [the  rags]  are  new.  They  [the  huts] 
are  new.  They  [the  poles]  are  rotten.  It  [the  book]  is  new. 

The  persons  of  the  verb  are  denoted  by  prefixes  differing 
from  those  given  above  only  in  the  third  person  singular, 
which  when  referring  to  living  beings  is  denoted  by  a-,  what- 
ever the  form  of  the  substantive  may  be. 

Yu-  is  employed  in  other  dialects,  but  scarcely  ever  in 
that  of  Zanzibar. 

Thus  the  present  perfect  of  the  verb  to  love,  is  expressed 
by  -mtpenda,  with  the  proper  personal  prefix. 

Nimependa,  I  have  loved.  Tumependa,  we  have  loved. 

Umependa,  you  have  loved.  Mmependa,  you  have  loved. 

Amependa,  he  or  she  has  loved.  Wamependa,  they  have  loved. 

Kimependa,  or  Umependa,  it  Vimependa,0rlmependa,^y 
has  loved.  have  loved. 

%*  -mependa,  has  loved;  -meanguka,  has  fallen ;  -mevun- 
jika,  is  broken  ;  -mekufa,  has  died,  or  is  dead;  -meonekana, 
has  become  visible,  or  is  in  sight;  -mepasuka,  is  split. 

Translate  into  Swahili— 

That  arrow  is  broken.  The  matting  bag  has  fallen.  The  baobab 
tree  has  fallen.  That  old  bedstead  is  broken.  The  oldperson  is  dead. 
The  large  bone  is  broken.  The  new  book  is  split.  "The  boundary  i» 
tisible.  The  heavy  burrier.  has  fallen.  The  buttons  are  broken.  The 


INTERROGATIVES.  9 

canoes  are  visible.  The  large  caravan  is  in  sight.  The  thick  chains 
are  broken.  The  chain  has  fallen.  The  great  chiefs  are  dead.  The 
little  child  is  dead.  That  tall  cocoa-nut  tree  has  fallen.  The  old  water- 
jar  is  broken.  The  little  comb  is  broken.  The  cook  is  in  sight.  The 
cup  is  broken.  These  new  cups  are  broken.  Two  date  trees  are  fallen. 
Four  doors  are  broken.  That  drunkard  has  fallen.  Seven  Europeans 
are  dead.  Two  fingers  are  broken. 


INTERROGATIVES. 
There  are  five  interrogatives  which  do  not  vary. 

Nani?     Who?  Gani?     Of  what  sort? 

Lini?     When?  Wapi?     Where  ? 

Nini  ?     What  ? 

The  interrogative  Which  ?  is  formed  by  adding  -pi  to  the 
pronominal  syllable. 

Mtu  yupi  ?     Which  man  ?  Miti  ipi  ?     Which  trees  ? 

Watuwapi?     Which  people?  Kitukipi?     Which  thing? 

Mti  upi  ?     Which  tree  ?  Vitu  vipi  ?     Which  things  ? 

Where  the  substantive  is  not  expressed,  the  interrogative 
must  be  in  form  proper  to  the  substantive  which  is  under- 
stood. 

Upi  ?     Which  ?  (tree)  Vipi  ?     Which  ?  (things) 

Yupi?     Which?  (man) 

The  interrogatives  liniy  gam,  and  wapi,  always  follow  the 
words  they  are  connected  with. 

Amekuja  lini  ?     When  did  he  come  t 
Mti  gani  ?     What  sort  of  tree  ? 

If  followed  by  a  demonstrative  the  verb  to  be  is  implied. 

Vitu  gani  hivi  ?     What  sort  of  things  are  these  ? 
Nani  huyu  ?     Who  is  this  ? 
Nani  mzee  huyu  ?     Who  is  this  old  man  ? 
Nini  hii  ?     What  are  these  ? 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

What  sort-  of  people  are  these?  Which  arrows?  What  sort  of 
matting  bags  ?  Which  baobab  tree  ?  What  sort  of  a  beclstead  is  this  ? 
Who  is  this  old  person  ?  What  sort  of  bone  is  this  ?  Which  books  ? 


10  SWAHILI    EXERCISES. 

What  sort  of  buttons  ?  Which  canoe  ?  What  sort  of  a  chain  ?  Which 
chair  ?  What  sort  of  chiefs  are  these  ?  Which  child  ?  Which  cocoa- 
nut  trees  ?  Which  date  tree  ?  Who  is  this  drunkard  ?  What  sort  of 
a  chief  is  this  drunkard  ?  What  sort  of  trees  are  those  ?  Which  hand  ? 
What  sort  of  game  is  this  ?  Which  hill  ?  Which  islands  are  those  ? 
What  sort  of  thing  is  this  knife  ?  What  sort  of  man  [i.e.  of  what  tribe] 
is  this  interpreter  ?  Which  mast  ?  What  sort  of  misfortune  ?  What 
sort  of  mountains  are  those  ?  What  sort  of  tree  is  a  palm  oil  tree  ? 
What  is  an  oath  ?  What  sort  of  an  overlooker  is  a  blind  person  ? 
Which  old  person  is  the  deaf  man?  Which  [man]  u  the  medicine 
man  ?  What  sort  of  pole  ?  Which  poles? 


THE  VERB. 

The  verb  is  conjugated  by  the  use  of  tense  prefixes  and 
personal  prefixes.  The  personal  prefixes  are  those  given 
above.  The  following  are  some  of  the  tense  prefixes : — 
present  imperfect,  -na-;  present  perfect,  -me-;  past  perfect, 
-//- ,-  future,  -fa-  ; 

Ninapenda,  I  am  loving.  Tunapenda,  we  are  loving. 

Nimependa,  /  have  loved.  Tumependa,  we  have  loved. 

Nilipenda,  /  Iwed.  Tulipenda,  we  loved. 

Nitapenda,  /  shall  love.  Tutapenda,  we  shall  love. 

Unapenda,  you  are  loving.  Mnapenda,  you  are  loving. 

Umependa,  you  have  loved.  Mmependa,  you  have  lovtd. 

Ulipenda,  you  loved.  Mlipenda,  you  loved. 

Utapenda,  you  will  love.  Mtapenda,  you  will  love, 

Anapenda,  he  (mtu)  or  she  is  loving.  Wanapenda,  they  (watu)  are  loving. 
Amependa,  he  has  loved.  Wamependa,  they  have  loved. 

Alipenda,  he  loved.  Walipenda,  they  loved. 

Atapenda,  he  will  love.  Watapenda,  they  will  love. 

Unaanguka,  it  (mti)  is  falling.  Inaanguka,  they  (miti)  are  falling. 

Umeanguka,  it  has  fallen.  Imeanguka,  they  have  fallen. 

Ulianguka,  it  fell.  Ilianguka,  they  fdl. 

Utaanguka,  it  will  fall.  Itaanguka,  they  wiUfall. 

Kinaanguka,  it  (kitu)  is  falling.  Vmaanguka,  they  (vitu)  are  falling. 

Kimeanguka,  it  has  fallen.  Vimeanguka,  they  have  fallen. 

Kilianguka,  it  fell.  Vilianguka,  they  fell. 

Kitaanguka,  it  will  fall.  Vitaanguka,  they  will  fall. 

The  infinitive  is  made  by  prefixing  ku-. 


VERBS. 


It 


LIST  OF  VERBS. 


Kukubali,  to  accept. 
,,  shtaki,  to  accuse. 
,,  pa  tana,  to  agree. 
„  badili,  to  alter. 
„  sumbua,  to  annoy. 
„  jibu,  to  answer. 
„  fika,  to  arrive,  to  reach, 
,,  uliza,  to  ask. 
,,  amka,  to  awake. 
,,  oga,  to  bathe. 

,  zaa,  to  bear  fruit. 

,  piga,  to  beat. 

,  omba,  to  beg. 

,  sadiki,  to  believe. 

,  urna,  /o  &'//, 

,  vuiua,  to  blow.  , 

,  jisifu,  A>  fo3j/.  •— 

,,  chemka,  to  boil. 
,,  raliwa,  fc>  fo  &>w. 
,,  piga  kofi,  to  box  tin  eart.        •» 
,,  vunja,  to  break. 
,,  leta,  to  bring. 
„  jenga,  to  build. 

,  waka,  to  burn  (neut.). 

,  teketeza,  to  burn  (act.). 

,  aika,  to  bury. 

,  nunua,  to  buy.  ._ 

,  ita,  to  call. 

,  angalia,  to  tnKe  cart. 

,  tunza,  to  take  care  of.  „ 

,  chukua,  to  carry. 
-  „  pakia,  to  carry  as  cargo. 
„  kamata,  to  catch  hold  of. 

—  ,,  claka,  to  catch  in  the  hand. 
,,  geuka,  to  be  changed. 

,,  danganya,  to  cheat. 

—  „  tafuna,  to  chew.  ' 
*•„  chagua,  to  expose. 

„  piga  makofi,  to  clap  the  hands. 
,,  safisha,  to  dean. 
„  panda,  to  climb  up. 
"-„  kusanya,  to  collect. 
,,  rudi,  to  come  back. 
,,  karibia,  to  came  near  to. 


Kutoka,  to  eotne,  or  go  ctf. 

, ,  shinda,  to  conquer. 

„  fikiri,  to  consider. 

„  pika,  to  cook. 

„  kohoa,  to  cough. 

,,  funika,  to  cover. 

,,  vuka,  to  cross  over. 

„  seta,  to  crush. 

„  Ha,  to  cry. 

t,  lima,  to  cultivate. 

„  ponya,  to  cure. 

„  kata,  to  cut,  to  cut  dew*. 

„  cheza,  to  dance. 

„  pungua,  to  decrease. 

„  linda,  to  defend. 
,  „  kawia,  to  delay. 

,,  kana,  to  deny. 

,,  haribu,  to  destroy. 

,,  cliimba,  to  dig. 

„  agiza,  to  direct. 

„  gawanya,  to  divide. 

,,  Tanya,  to  do. 

, ,  kokota,  to  draff. 

„  vuta,  to  draw. 

„  piga  mstari,  /Vr  draw  a  lint. 

„  teka  maji,  to  draw  water. 

„  ota,  to  dream. 

n  fukuza,  to  drive  away. 

,,  kauka,  to  get  dry. 

,,  anika,  to  put  out  to  dry. 

,,  mwaga,  to  empty  out. 

,,  isha,  to  end. 

,,  ingia,  to  enter. 

„  okoka,  to  escape. 

,,  eleza,  to  explain. 
"  „  punguka,  to  fail. 

„  anguka,  to  fall. 

,,  funga,  to  fasten,  lindt  sKut» 
„  ogopa,  to  fear. 

„  lisha,  to  feed. 

„  pigana,  to/^/. 

„  ona,  to  find. 

„  maliza,  to  finish. 

„  isha,  ^  be  finished. 


SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 


£ukaza,  to  fix, 
„  ruka,  to  fly. 
,  kunja,  to  fold. 
,  fuata,  to  follow. 
,  gombeza,  to  forbid 
,  sahau,  to  forget. 
,  samehe,  to  forgive. 
,  pata,  to  get. 
,  lewa,  to  get  drunk. 
,  toka,  to  get  out. 
,  oncloka,  to  get  up.  1 
,  rudi,  to  go  back. 
,  oza,  to  go  bad. 
,  tangulia,  to  go  before. 
,  pita,  to  go  by. 
,  shuka,  to  go,  or  come  daw*, 
,  saga,  to  grind. 
,  linda,  to  guard. 
,  thuru,  to  harm. 
,  chukia,  to  hate. 
,  sikia,  to  hear. 
,  sayidia,  to  help. 
t  ficha,  to  hide. 
,  zuia,  to  hinder. 

tweka,  to  hoist. 
,  shika,  to  hold. 
,  uma,  to  hurt. 
,  unga,  to  join. 

amua,  to  judge. 

ruka,  to  jump. 

piga  teke,  to  kick. 

ua,  to  kill. 

chinja,  to  kill  for  food. 

jua,  to  know. 

cheka,  to  laugh. 

jifunza,  to  learn. 

acha,  to  leave. 

aga,  to  take  leave  of. 

inua,  to  lift  up. 

penda,  to  like. 

sikiliza,  to  listen. 

tazama,  to  look. 

tafuta,  to  look  for. 

legeza,  to  loosen. 

potea,  to  be  lost. 

penda,  to  love. 
,,  shusha,  to  lawtr. 


Kufanya,  to  make. 
,,  oa,  to  marry  a  wife, 
„  pima,  to  measure. 
„  onana,  to  meet. 
,,  kuta,  to  meet  with. 
«v  t>  yeyuka,  to  melt. 
,,  kosa,  to  miss. 
, ,  changanya,  to  mix. 
,,  amuru,  to  order. 
„  pindua,  to  overturn. 

—  ,,  wiwa,  to  owe. 
,,  uma,  to  pain* 
,,  pita,  to  pass. 
„  lipa,  to  pay. 

,,  okota,  to  pick  up. 

,,  weka,  to  place. 

„  pendeza,  to  please. 
^   „  mimina,  to  pour. 

„  sifu,  to  praise. 

,,  omba,  to  pray. 
•—  f,  fanikiwa,  to  prosper. 

,,  vuta,  to  pull. 
— „  ng'oa,  to  pull  up. 

„  sukuma,  to  push. 

,,  tia,  to  />«/. 

„  weka,  to  put  away. 

,,  vaa,  to  put  on  (clothes). 

,,  toa,  to  put  out. 

,,  zima,  ^<7  ^«/  ow/  a  /(f///. 
_^  „  gombana,  /o  quarrel. 

,,  soma,  /<?  r^a^/. 

,,  pokea,  to  receive. 

,,  kumbuka,  to  recollect. 

, ,  kataa,  to  refuse. 
~  „  juta,  to  njfnrf. 

—  „  furahi,  to  rejoice. 

,,  salia,  to  remain  over. 
,,  kaa,  to  remain  (in  a  place). 
„  kumbuka,  to  remember. 
,,  kumbusha,  to  remind. 
,,  pumzika,  to  r«/. 
, ,  rudi,  to  return,  to  go  back. 
„  rudisha,  to  return^  to  give  bask, 
,,  oka,  to  natf. 
,,  oza,  to  r0/. 
-^,,  viringa,  to  fe  rottnd. 
„  sugua, 


VERBS. 


Kupiga  mbij,  to  run. 

,,  kimbia,  to  run  away,  toy?«. 

,,  sema,  to  jaf. 
..  ,,  tawanya,  to  scalier. 
^  „  tharau,  to  .swrtt,. 
-  „  kuna,  to  scratch. 

,,  tafuta,  to  search  for. 

„  ona,  to  jff. 

„  peleka,  to  ««</. 

, ,  shona,  to  j*w. 
— -  „  tik;sa,  to  J^a&r. 

„  nyoa,  to  shave. 

„  onyesha,  to  j/;cra/. 
«.  „  imba,  to  «'«£. 

,,  zama,  to  «'«£. 

,,  kaa  kitako,  to  «V  abwit. 

,,  lala,  to  j/«/. 

,,  nuka,  to  smell  (n). 
— ,,  sikitika,  to  &  JWT/. 
— „  nena,  to  J/<M£. 

,,  tumia,  to  spend. 

„  tnwaga,  to  spill. 

„  pasua,  to  J//JA 
«-  „  enea,  to  spread  (n). 

„  si  mam  a,  to  stand. 

,,  kaa,  to  jfoj. 

,,  piga,  to  rfn'/fc. 

,,  tosha,  to  suffice. 
_»,  toshea,  to  surprise. 
~ ,,  zunguka,  to  surround. 

„  fagia,  to  sweep. 
_  „  vimba,  to  jw^//. 

*^*  In  Swahili  a  question 
an  assertion. 


Umesikia. 


Kutwaa,  to  /a^if. 

„  angalia, 

,,  vua,  to  to;>5<r  off  (clothes}. 

,,  sema,  to  talk. 
•m  ,,  onja,  to  /<wto. 

„  fundisha,  to  feaiv£. 

,,  tatua,  to  toar  (cloth,  etc. ). 

^,,  rarua,  to  toar  in  pieces. 

i)  ambia,  to  to//. 

,,  fikiri,  to  think,  to  consider. 

,,  thani,  to  think,  to  suppose. 

„  tupa,  to  throw. 

„  funga,  to  //V. 

„  choka,  to  become  tired. 
- ,,  gusa,  to  toȣ$. 

„  safari,  to  travel. 

„  jaribu,  to  fry. 

„  geuza,  to  f«r«.  (act.). 

,,  geuka,  to  f«r«  (neut.). 
—  „  funua,  to  uncover. 

,,  fungua,  to  unfasten,  open. 

,,  tumia,  to  t/;^. 

„  ngoja,  to  wa«V. 

,,  tembea,  to  «>a/£. 

,,  taka,  to  want. 

,,  osha,  to  wash. 

,,  futa,  to  TW^. 
"""  „  nyima,  to  withhold. 
—     ,,  taajabu,  to  wonder. 

•  „  abudui  to  worship. 

„  andika, 


is  written  in  the  same  form  as 


Umesikia  ? 


Translate  into  Swahili— 

I  have  accepted.  Thou  wilt  accuse.  We  have  agreed.  They 
[things]  will  alter.  They  [people]  will  annoy.  I  answered.  They 
[trees]  are  bearing  fruit  The  blind  man  is  begging.  I  believe.  The 
chiefs  have  arrived.  The  simpletons  are  asking.  The  hippopotamus 
is  awaking.  We  shall  bathe.  The  fleas  will  bite.  The  children  are 
boasting.  Fpui  children  have  been  bom.  The  Europeans  have 
bought.  The  cook  built.  You  [pi.]  bought.  The  old  people  called. 


14  SWAHILI  EXERCISES. 

She  is  taking  care.  The  caravan  porters  are  carrying.  The  overseer 
caught  in  his  hand.  The  date  tree  is  changed.  The  medicine  men 
have  cheated.  The  chief  will  choose.  The  herdsmen  are  clapping 
their  hands.  The  child  will  climb  up.  The  European  will  conquer. 
I  am  considering.  The  cook  has  cooked.  They  are  coughing.  The 
lid  covered.  That  caravan  has  crossed  over.  These  children  will  cry. 
The  slaves  will  cultivate.  Those  sharp  knives  will  cut.  The  slave 
women  are  dancing.  Misfortunes  are  decreasing.  Those  bad  slaves 
are  delaying.  The  slave  boys  dag.  We  shall  divide.  He  has  done. 
Those  slaves  have  drawn  water.  I  have  drawn  a  line.  That  old  man 
dreamed.  The  onion  has  got  dry.  The  drunkards  are  fighting.  The 
arrow  entered.  The  tall  trees  fell.  The  six  Europeans  have  got 
drunk.  The  loaf  has  gone  bad.  The  women  slaves  are  grinding. 
The  chief  went  before.  You  listened.  You  will  cook.  I  am  looking 
for.  The  old  man  has  married  a  wife.  That  piece  has  melted.  They 
will  pay.  We  picked  up.  The  savage  chief  prospered.  You  [sing.] 
are  pushing.  I  am  reading.  The  chief  refused.  The  slave  regretted. 
The  caravan  porters  are  resting.  That  hand  is  swelling. 


THE   OBJECTIVE  PREFIX. 

When  the  object  of  the  verb  is  some  definite  thing,  it  is 
denoted  by  a  prefix  inserted  after  the  tense  prefix.  The 
objective  prefix  is  generally  the  same  as  the  subjective  ox 
personal  prefix.  It  differs  only  in  the  second,  and  in  the 
third  persons  when  referring  to  persons  or  animated  beings. 

Me,  — ni-.  Us,  — tu-. 

TJice,  —  ku-.  You,  — wa-. 

Him  or  her,  — m-.  TJiem,  — wa-. 

//  (rnti),  — u-.  Them  (mti),  — i-. 

//  (kitu),  — ki-.  Them  (vitu),  — vi-. 

Ananipenda,  Jit  likes  me. 
Anakupcnda,  he  likts  you. 
Anampenda,  he  likes  him  or  her. 
Anaupenda,  he  likes  it  (the  tree). 
Anakipenda,  he  likes  it  (tkt  thing). 
Anatupenda,  fit  likes  tu. 
Anawapenda,  he  likes  you  (pi.). 
Anawapenda,  he  likes  them  (people). 
Anaipenda,  he  likes  them  (the  trees). 
Anavipenda,  he  likes  them  (the  things). 


THE  OBJECTIVE  PREFIX.  15 

Substantives  and  pronouns  have  no  distinct  form  for  the 
accusative  or  objective  case. 

Mtu  anapiga  mtu,  a  man  is  beating  a  man. 

When  the  object  of  the  verb  is  expressed,  and  the 
objective  prefix  is  also  employed,  the  definite  article  must 
ordinarily  be  used  in  the  English. 

Anapiga  mtu,  he  is  beating  a  man. 
Anampiga  mtu,  he  is  beating  the  man. 
Anakata  inti,  he  is  cutting  down  a  tree. 
Anaukata  mti,  he  is  cutting  down  the  tree. 

When  the  object  of  the  verb  is  expressed  by  a  pronoun 
the  objective  prefix  must  always  be  used. 

Anampiga,  he  is  beating  him. 
Anampiga  yule,  he  is  beating  that  (man). 
Anaukata,  he  is  cutting  it  down  (the  tree). 
Anaukata  ule,  he  is  cutting  down  that  (tree), 

-sf/fis  denoted  by  -jU 

Najipenda,  I  love  myself. 
Utajiuma,  you  -will  hurt  yourself. 
Amejificha,  he  has  hidden  himself. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

This  action  annoys  me.  The  arrow  hit  him.  Those  arrows  missed 
them.  He  is  carrying  six  matting  bags.  Three  baobab  trees  have 
fallen.  They  have  brought  two  bedsteads.  They  have  brought  the 
two  bedsteads.  You  will  leave  the  bones.  I  have  seen  the  book. 
They  have  passed  the  boundaries.  Six  caravan  porters  are  carrying 
the  nine  burdens.  You  are  unfastening  the  button.  Ten  men  are 
dragging  the  two  large  cannons.  Six  men  pushed  the  canoe.  I  see 
a  caravan.  You  'saw  the  two  caravans.  lie  will  fasten  the  chain. 
The  chief  has  brought  a  cfiair.  I  shall  get  that  chair.  The  chiefs  will 
pay  me.  I  met  with  four  children.  You  have  passed  the  children. 
The  Europeans  have  cut  down  the  cocoa-nut  trees.  The  cook  has 
broken  this  water-jar.  The  slave  girl  has  got  a  beautiful  comb.  The 
herdsman  is  beating  the  cook.  I  want  a  cook.  I  have  cut  the  cork. 
He  has  picked  up  a  cup.  Those  two  date  trees  are  bearing  fruit.  The 
door  has  rotted.  The  Europeans  have  killed  that  idle  cook.  This 
finger  is  paining  me.  The  ten  fishermen  are  coming  back.  I  have 
killed  seven  Seas.  The  handle  struck  the  foot.  They  saw  the  foreigners. 
The  guards  ran  away.  They  lifted  up  two  hands.  We  saw  the  hands. 
We  passed  two  hills.  The  Europeans  killed  six  hippopotamus.  The 
•Uangers  built  two  huts.  The  chief  burnt  down  the  two  huts.  The 


1 6  SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 

little  interpreter  boasted.  The  interpreter  showed  me  the  two  large 
islands.  You  have  received  the  knife.  The  cook  is  rubbing  the  lid. 
He  showed  me  the  line.  The  foreigner  has  cut  the  loaf.  I  have 
broken  the  looking-glasses.  The  two  masts  are  broken.  I  have  found 
the  little  mountain.  The  nurse  is  feeding  the  children.  The  old  people 
are  listening.  I  have  tasted  the  onions.  The  overseer  is  beating  tne 
slaves.  I  am  looking  for  a  palm-oil  tree.  The  mangouste  has  bitten 
that  piece.  The  slave  will  bring  a  pillow.  The  poles  have  arrived. 
I  will  pay  the  caravan  porters.  The  sweet  potatoes  have  gone  bad. 
They  will  crush  the  potsherds.  He  brought  the  empty  purse.  We 
tore  the  rag.  I  saw  six  recesses.  The  slaves  loved  themselves.  The 
chief  is  praising  himself.  You  have  tied  yourself.  The  children  fed 
themselves.  They  will  harm  themselves.  The  simpletons  are  over- 
turning themselves.  _  The  idle  slaves  are  scratching  themselves. 

VOWEL  ROOTS. 

I.  The  m-  prefix,  however  employed,  appears  generally 
before  a  vowel  root  as  mw- ;  the  w  is  very  faint  before  o  and 
u,  and  often  seems  entirely  to  disappear. 

The  u>a-  prefix  coalesces  with  an  initial  e  or  <  into  the 
sound  of  we-. 

Substantives  in  M-  followed  by  a  vowel,  with  their 
plurals : — 

Mwaka,  a  year,  (miaka)  Mwenyewe,  the  owner,  (wenyewe) 

Mwalimu,  a  teacher,  (waalimu)  Mwenzi,  a  companion,  (wenzi) 

Mwamba,  a  rock,  (miamba)  Mwezi,  the  moon,  or  a  month. 
Mwamuzi,  a  judge,  (waamuzi)  (miezi) 

Mwana,  a  son.  (waana)  Mwiba,  a  thorn,  (miiba) 

Mwandishi,  a  ^vritrr.  (waandishi)  Mwiko,  a  spoon,  (miiko) 

Mwanzo,  a  beginning,  (mianzo)  Mwili,  the  body,  (miili) 

Mwashi,  a  mason,  (waashi)  Mwisho,  the  end.  (miisho) 

Mwana  mume,    a  man.    ^waana  Mwivi,  a  thief,  (wevi) 

waume)  Mwoga,  a  coward,  (waoga) 

Mwanat  mke,   a  -woman,    (waana  Mwokozi,  a  saviour,  (waokozi) 

wake)'  Moshi,  smoke,  (mioshi) 

Mwavuli,  an  umbrella,  (miavuli)  Moto,yfor.  (mioto) 

Mwembe,  a  mango  tree,  (miembe)  Mo}  o,  the  heart,  (mioyo) 

Adjectives  beginning  with  a  vowel : — 

Black,  — eusi.  Gentle,  — anana. 

Cunning,  — erevu.  Good,  — ema. 

Different,  — ingine.  Having,  — enyi. 

£asyt  — epesi.  Light  (not  dark),  — eupe. 


VOWEL   ROOTS.  17 

Light  (not  heavy),  — epesi.  Red,  — ekundu. 

Male,  — ume.  Slender,  — embamba. 

Many,  much,  — ingi.  Soft,  — ororo. 

Narrow,  — embamba.  White,  — eupe. 
Other,  — ingine. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

I  saw  four  red  people.  Two  black  people  found  a  white  person. 
This  line  is  narrow.  I  drew  a  black  line.  The  fire  is  burning.  These 
burdens  are  light.  Those  black  burdens  are  heavy.  A  light  heart. 
Thick  [zito]  smoke.  We  shall  see  the  black  smoke.  We  shall  leave 
two  large  fires.  You  have  forgotten  those  hearts.  Those  years  are 
short.  Two  teachers  taught  me.  The  white  rock  has  sunk.  I  have 
told  the  judge.  The  four  judges  heard  us.  You  will  call  the  writer. 
I  heard  the  bad  beginning.  Two  good  beginnings.  The  two  masons 
built  two  huts.  This  mason  used  many  poles.  The  Europeans  bought 
many  large  umbrellas.  They  are  cutting  down  those  good  mango  trees. 
We  have  passed  the  owners.  The  beautiful  moon  has  sunk.  These 
months  are  good,  those  are  bad.  Two  thorns  entered  the  hand.  These 
spoons  are  large  [and]  beautiful.  The  thieves  ran  away.  Two  cunning 
thieves  took  the  canoe.  The  cowards  feared  the  old  man. 

II.  The  ki-  and  vi-  prefixes  before  a  vowel  become  ch- 
and  vy-. 

Kitu  chekundu,  a  red  thing. 
Vitu  vyekundu,  red  things. 
Chombo  kikubwa,  a  large  vessel. 
Kitu  cheusi  kimoja,  one  black  thing. 
Vitu  vyeusi  viwili,  two  black  things. 
\  Chombo  kidogo  kizuri,  a  beautiful  little  vessel. 

Substantives  of  the  ki-  class  in  which  the  prefix  becomes 
th-  because  followed  by  a  vowel : — 

Chakula,  food,  (vyakula)  Chura,  a  frog,     (vyura) 

Chambo,  a  bait,     (vyambo^  Chuma,  iron,  or  a  piece  of  iron, 
Change,  a  peg.     (vyango)  (vyuma) 

Chanu,  a  wooden  platter  used  for    Chumba,     a    chamber,    a    room. 

carrying  mortar,     (vyanu)  (vyumba) 

Cheo,  measurement,     (vyeo)  Chungu,  an  earthen  cooking  pot. 
Cheti,  a  passport,     (vyeti)  (vyungu) 

Chombo,  a  vessel,     (vyombo)  Chuo,  a  book,     (vyuo) 

Choo,  a  wetter-closet,     (vyoo)  Chusa,  a  harpoon,     (vyusa) 

Slaves  and  others  from  the  interior  often  incorrectly  change 
the  ki-  prefix  into  chi-,  after  the  analogy  of  the  Yao  and 
Other  inland  languages  Thus  they  say  chikapo,  a  basket, 

c 


1 8  SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 

for  kikapu  j  chidogo,  /////;,  for  kidogo ;  chilezo,  a  buoy,  for 
kilezo,  and  so  forth.  In  correct  Swahili  ki-  never  becomes 
<:/«'-,  but  only  ch-  before  a  vowel 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

Good  food.  The  fisherman  has  taken  the  bait.  These  five  black 
pegs.  I  have  bought  ten  large  mortar  platters.  This  measurement 
is  short.  I  have  got  two  passports.  He  saw  one  red  vessel.  I  have 
seen  six  black  vessels.  Ten  cunning  frogs.  Iron  is  heavy.  These 
irons  are  light.  You  have  brought  one  red  cooking-pot.  I  shall  want 
three  small  black  cooking-pots.  You  will  carry  that  large  book.  He 
is  carrying  two  thick  red  books.  I  took  the  large  harpooa. 


VOWEL  TENSES. 

The  Indefinite  Present  is  denoted  by  the  prefix  -a->  The 
Past  Perfect  is  often  formed  by  the  prefix  -alt-. 

Before  the  vowel  the  personal  prefixes  become,  «-[!], 
zr-Fyou],  /z#-[we],  mzv-[you],  z0-[they],  w-  or  <^-[it],  y-  or 


The  a-  which  is  the  sign  of  the  third  person  singular  is 
absorbed  into  the  -a-  of  the  tense  prefix  and  disappears. 
The  -a-  of  the  plural  prefix  wa-  disappears  in  the  same 
manner. 

Nataka,  /  want.  Twataka,  -we  want. 

Wataka,  you  want.  Mwataka,  you  want. 

Ataka,  he  or  she  wants.  Wataka,  they  want. 

Wataka,  it  (mti)  wants.  Yataka,  they  (miti)  want. 

Chataka,  it  (kitu)  wants.  Vyataka,  they  (vitu)  want. 

The  prefixes  are  the  same  with  the  past  tense  in  -a//-, 
which  is  used  indifferently  for  the  tense  in  -//-. 

Nalitaka  or  Nilitaka,  I  wanted. 
Translate  into  Swahili — 

The  chief  wants  a  large  vessel.  The  large  mango  tree  felL  This 
knife  wants  a  large  handle.  The  chief  loves  old  men.  The  masons 
want  red  umbrellas.  The  trees  surround  the  hut.  The  bait  pleases 
him.  The  slaves  hated  me.  The  foreigners  feared  us.  The  lid  covers 
two  cooking-pots.  They  saw  the  passports.  This  food  pleases.  The 
books  arrived.  You  ivere  born.  He  boasted.  You  awoke,  The  tall 


THE  POSSESSIVE  CASE.  19 

trees  fell.  He  shut  the  door.  I  love  the  old  man.  We  hate  them. 
They  saw  the  four  black  slaves.  The  four  black  slaves  saw  them.  The 
hut  pleases  me. 

THE  POSSESSIVE  CASE. 

There  is  no  true  Possessive  Case  in  Swahili,  it  is  always 
represented  by  the  particle  -a,  with  appropriate  initial  letters, 
answering  very  closely  to  the  English  word  of. 

The  order  of  the  words  is  the  same  as  when  in  English 
the  word  of  is  used. 

Mji  wa  mfalme,  the  town  oftJte  chief. 

The  initial  letter  is  determined  by  the  form  of  the  pre- 
ceding word,  that  is,  of  the  thing  possessed,  not  of  the 
possessor. 

Kiti  cha  mzee,  the  chair  of  the  old  man. 

Mfuko  wa  mzee,  the  old  man's  bag. 

Miti  ya  mzee,  the  old  man's  trees. 

Visu  vya  mzee,  the  old  man's  knives. 

The  proper  initial  letters  are,  i.  After  singular  nouns  in 
»/-,  w-'y  2.  After  plural  nouns  in  iva-,  w-'}  3.  After  plural 
nouns  in  mi-,  y-\  4.  After  singular  nouns  in  ki-  [or  cA-],  ch~\ 
5.  After  plural  nouns  in  vi-  [or  vy-],  vy-. 

Mtumwa  wa  mkalimani,  the  interpreter's  slave. 
Watumwa  wa  kipofu,  the  blind  man's  slaves. 
Mti  wa  Mzungu,  the  European's  tree. 
Miti  ya  Wazungu,  the  Europeans'  trees. 
.Kisu  cha  kijakazi,  the  slave  girfs  knife. 
Visu  vya  walevi,  the  drunken  men's  knout. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

I  took  the  European's  knife.  I  shall  see  the  chiefs  town.  You  will 
hurt  the  old  man's  head.  I  have  found  the  drunkard's  waistcoat.  We 
have  passed  the  European's  well.  I  see  the  black  smoke  of  a  great  fire. 
They  are  burning  the  deaf  man's  books.  The  chiefs  slaves  took  the 
fisherman's  canoe.  The  slave's  knife  struck  the  stranger's  arm.  They 
have  hidden  the  canoe's  mast.  The  old  man's  oath.  The  stranger's 
misfortunes.  The  idle  slave's  chains.  The  porters'  burdens.  "The 
cook's  door.  The  nurse's  lips.  The  children's  arrows.  The  blind 
man's  hut.  The  mangouste  s  tail.  The  mangouste  has  bitten  the 
child's  hand.  The  European's  shoes. 


SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 


THE  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 

The  Possessive  Pronouns  consist  of  an  invariable  part 
preceded  by  the  appropriate  consonants,  which  are  the  same 
as  those  used  with  the  particle  -0  (of).  The  invariable  parts 
are — 

-angu,  my.  -etu,  our. 

-ako,  thy  or  your,  -enu,  your. 

-ake,  or  akwe,  his,  hers,  or  its .  -ao,  their. 

The  Possessive  Pronoun  always  follows  the  name  of  the 
thing  possessed,  and  changes  its  initials  according  to  the 
form  of  the  word  it  follows, 

Mtu  wake,  his  man.  Mtu  wangu,  my  man. 

Watu  wake,  his  people.  \Vatu  wako,  your  people. 

Mti  wake,  his  tree.  Miti  yetu,  our  trees. 

Miti  yake,  his  trees.  Kisu  chenu,  your  knife. 

Kisu  chake,  his  knife.  Visu  vyao,  their  knives. 
Visu  vyake,  his  knives. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

Our  chief  has  killed  your  slave.  The  Europeans  have  cut  down  their 
date  trees.  My  cocoa-nut  tree  is  bearing  fruit.  His  knife  is  sharp. 
His  arrow  struck  me.  Their  large  vessel  has  sunk.  They  liked  their 
food.  Our  hut  has  fallen.  Your  trees  please  me.  The  old  man  wants 
my  waistcoat.  My  head  is  paining  me.  My  hand  is  touching  the  tree. 
I  see  the  handle  of  it.  I  carried  his  chain.  Your  chains  are  heavy. 
You  will  take  our  slaves.  I  shall  leave  your  arrows.  Their  actions 
have  pleased  us.  You  [pi.]  will  hate  our  chief.  Our  people  hate 
foreigners.  He  has  hidden  my  knife.  My  man  is  taking  your  waist- 
coat. Their  spears  are  long.  The  fisherman's  heart  is  light.  The 
smoke  of  their  fire  is  much. 

Him  and  His. — Where  something  is  done  to  one  person 
by  another  which  affects  one  part  only  or  specially,  such  as 
striking,  binding,  etc.,  the  possessive  pronoun  is  used  in 
English;  but  in  Swahili  the  objective  prefix  denoting  the 
person  is  commonly  used,  followed  by  the  name  of  the  part 
affected. 

Alinipiga  jicho,  he  struck  my  eye. 

Aliixifunga  mikonp,  /if  (ted  mv  hands. 


THE  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS.  91 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

I  struck  his  leg.  He  hit  my  head.  I  tied  his  legs.  They  hurt  my 
hands.  The  mangouste  bit  his  finger.  The  slaves  cut  my  head.  The 
knife  touched  my  arm.  The  slave  woman  rubbed  his  feet.  She 
scratched  my  hand.  The  chief  unfastened  the  slave's  hands.  He  has 
hurt  his  own  eye.  He  will  tie  his  own  hands. 

All,  Having,  Itself,  By  Itself.— The  words  -ote,  all, 
-enyi  or  -inyi,  having,  -enyewe,  -self  or  -selves,  take  the  same 
initial  letters  as  those  taken  by  the  Possessive  Pronouns. 
By  itself,  by  myself,  by  themselves,  etc.,  is  expressed  by  the 
word/&&,  followed  by  the  appropriate  Possessive  Pronoun* 

Watu  wote,  all  people,  or  all  the  people. 
Mti  wote,  all  the  tree,  or  the  whole  tree, 
Miti  yote,  all  the  trees,  or  all  trees. 
Kisu  chote,  all  the  knife,  or  the  whole  knife» 
Visu  vyote,  all  the  knives,  or  all  knives. 

Mtu  mwenyi  mali,  a  man  having  propeitf. 
Watu  wenyi  mali,  people  with  property. 
Mti  mwenyi  majani,  a  tree  having  leaver 
Miti  yenyi  majani,  trees  having  leaves. 
Kisu  chenyi  kipini,  a  knife  with  a  handle* 
Visu  vyenyi  vipini,  knives  with  handles. 

Mimi  mwenyewe,  /  myself. 
Sisi  wenyewe,  we  ourselves. 
Mtu  mwenyewe,  the  man  himself. 
Watu  wenyewe,  people  thernseivei. 
Mti  mwenyewe,  the  tree  itself. 
Miti  yenyewe,  the  trees  themse&?s. 
Kisu  chenyewe,  the  knife  itself. 
Visu  vyenyewe,  knives  themselvet, 

Mtu  peke  yake,  the  ma*  by  himself. 
Watu  peke  yao,  people  by  themselvet. 
Mimi  peke  yangu,  I  by  myself. 
Wewe  peke  yako,  you  by  yourself. 
Sisi  peke  yetu,  we  by  ourselves. 
Ninyi  peke  yenu,  you  by  yourselves. 
Kisu  peke  yake,  the  knife  by  itself. 
Visu  peke  yao,  the  knives  by  themselves 

The  word  -ote,  all,  has  special  forms  for  the  first  and 


23  SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 

second  persons  plural,  which  are  also  used  in  the  sense  of 
together. 

Sisi  sote,  we  all,  or  we  together. 
Ninyi  nyote,  you  all,  or  you  together. 
Twende  sote,  let  us  go  together. 
Wote  wawili,  both,  or  the  two  together, 

The  word  -enyi  is  used  to  express  the  having  in  any  way, 
and  must  sometimes  be  translated  by  the  use  of  the  relative, 
or  of  the  preposition  with, 

Mtu  mwenyi  kupenda,  a  person  having  loving,  i.e.  one  who  loves, 
Miti  yenyi  kuzaa,  trees  having  fruitbearing,  i.e.  trees  which  bear  fruit, 
Kitanda  chenyi  godoro,  a  bedstead  having  a  mattress,  i.e.  a  bedstead 
•with  a  mattress, 

Peke,  with  its  possessive  pronoun,  may  be  translated  alone, 
or  only. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

All  slaves.  All  things.  All  trees.  All  slaves  having  huts.  All 
things  with  an  end.  AH  trees  by  themselves.  I  saw  him  by  himself. 
I  saw  both  these  people.  I  am  able  by  myself  to  lift  this  water-jar. 
You  [pi.]  saw  us  together.  They  will  all  run  away.  They  will  throw 
all  the  spears.  The  thieves  took  all  our.turbans.  We  have  found  them 
[the  turbans]  all.  I  saw  three  shadows,  you  saw  one  only.  I  saw  two 
baobab  trees,  you  saw  them  alL  I  saw  the  hippopotamus  myself.  I 
saw  the  mountains  themselves.  The  chiefs  with  turbans  told  me.  A 
mangouste  with  a  tail.  A  tree  with  many  thorns.  I  told  the  six  old 
men  with  umbrellas.  The  chief  himself  took  all  the  spears  with  beauti- 
ful handles.  I  stood  by  myself.  We  looked  together.  The  spoons 
ran  away  by  themselves.  The  wizard  saw  them  [the  spoons]  all.  The 
wizard  cheated  both  the  thieves.  They  all  searched.  The  whole  moon 
it  visible.  All  the  vessels  will  sink.  The  books  are  all  large. 

THE  RELATIVE. 

The  Relative  Pronoun  is  expressed  by  a  syllable  formed 
of  the  letter  -o,  preceded  by  the  initial  consonants  proper  to 
its  antecedent.  The  syllable  seldom  stands  alone  except  in 
connection  with  the  word  -ote,  all,  in  the  sense  of  whichsoever. 

Mti  wo  wote,  any  tree  whatever, 

Miti  yo  yote,  any  trees  whatever, 

Kitu  cho  chote,  any  thing  whatever. 

Vitu  vyo  vyote,  any  things  whatever, 

Watu  wo  wote,  any  people  whoever  they  may  bt. 


THE  RELATIVE.  3$ 

When  referring  to  a  singular  substantive  denoting  a  person, 
it  is  most  correct  to  employ^  as  the  relative  syllable,  though 
in  Zanzibar  it  is  very  common  to  use  o  alone. 

Mtu  ye  yote,  any  man, 

The  Relative  is  commonly  joined  with  a  verb.  It  then 
follows  the  tense  prefix.  The  tenses  with  which  it  is  ordin- 
arily used  are  the  present,  with  the  prefix  -na-,  the  past,  with 
the  prefix  -/*"-  or  -alt-,  and  the  future.  The  prefix  of  the 
future,  when  followed  by  a  relative,  becomes  -taka-  instead 
of  -fa-. 

When  connected  with  a  verb,  -o-  is  always  used  instead  erf 
-wo-. 

Mtu  anayesimama,  the  man  who  is  standing* 
Watu  wanaosimama,  the  people  who  are  standing. 
Mti  unaoanguka,  the  tree  which  is  falling. 
Miti  inayoanguka,  the  trees  which  are  falling. 
Kitu  kinachoanguka,  the  thing  which  is  falling. 
Vitu  vinavyoanguka,  the  things  which  are  falling. 

Mtu  aliyesimama,  the  man  who  stood. 
Watu  waliosimama,  the  people  who  stood. 
Mti  ulioanguka,  the  tree  which  fell. 
Miti  iliyoanguka,  the  trees  which  fell. 
Kitu  kilichoanguka,  the  thing  which  fell. 
Vitu  vilivyoanguka,  the  things  which  fell, 

Mtu  atakayesimama,  the  man  who  will  stand. 
Watu  watakaosimama,  the  people  who  will  stand, 
Mti  utakaoanguka,  the  tree  which  will  fall. 
Miti  itakayoanguka,  the  trees  which  will  fall. 
Kitu  kitakachoanguka,  the  thing  which  will  fall. 
Vitu  vitakavyoanguka,  the  things  which  will  fall. 

The  Relative  forms  for  the  third  person  are  used  also  for 
the  first  and  second,  and  if  an  objective  prefix  is  employed 
it  follows  the  relative. 

Niliyemwona,  I  who  saw  him.  Tuliomwona,  we  who  saw  him. 

Uliyemwona,  you  who  saw  him.         Mliomwona,  you  who  taw  him. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

God  who  sees  me.  You  who  worship  God.  People  who  worshipped 
many  gods.  A  shadow  which  is  passing.  Slave  women  who  we  c«ny« 


24  SWAHILI  EXERCISES. 

ing  water-jars.  A  man  who  will  throw  a  spear.  A  spear  which  will 
strike  me.  You  who  will  see  the  spear.  His  spear  which  will  kill  me. 
They  who  know  him.  They  will  know  the  trees  which  will  fall.  The 
trees  which  will  fall  will  crush  your  hut.  The  slave  who  brought  a 
chair.  A  chair  which  was  broken.  He  who  broke  the  chair.  His 
fellow  slaves  who  will  beat  him.  The  slave  women  who  will  laugh. 
The  simpletons  who  will  run  away.  The  European  who  will  cross  the 
river.  The  European  who  will  sink.  The  servants  who  liked  sweet 
potatoes.  The  sweet  potatoes  which  are  going  bad.  The  vine  which 
is  bearing  fruit.  I  saw  the  date  tree  which  bore  fruit.  You  will  see 
the  sore  which  is  paining  him.  The  sick  people  who  will  wonder. 
The  xiedicine  man  who  will  cure  them.  The  simpletons  who  will  pay 
the  wizard  who  has  cheated  them.  The  chief  who  loves  his  wife.  The 
chief  who  loved  his  children.  The  cook  who  cooked  my  food.  The 
servant  who  brought  my  food.  The  good  food  which  killed  them  all. 

When  the  Relative  is  the  object  of  the  verb,  the  same 
forms  are  used,  and  the  proper  objective  prefix  is  added. 

Mtu  niliyemwona,  the  man  whom  I  saw, 
Mti  nilioukata,  the  tree  which  I  cut  dcnvn. 
Mikuke  niliyoinunua,  the  spears  which  I  bought, 
Kisu  nilichokinunua,  the  knife  which  I  bought, 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

The  action  which  you  have  done.  The  bedstead  which  you  broke. 
The  bone  which  he  picked  up.  The  book  which  they  took.  The 
boundary  which  you  will  pass.  The  burdens  which  the  porters  carried. 
The  chief  whom  they  are  killing.  The  children  whom  she  bore.  The 
door  which  I  am  fastening.  The  Europeans  whom  you  will  see.  The 
finger  which  he  bit.  The  foreigner  whom  they  are  beating.  The  hill 
which  you  saw.  The  hippopotamus  which  they  killed.  The  hut  which 
he  built.  The  old  person  whom  they  pushed.  The  onions  which  you 
[pi.]  liked.  The  piece  which  you  [pi.]  will  receive.  The  pole  which 
you  will  place. 

The  Relative  is  much  used  with  interrogatives. 

Aliyenipiga  nani  ?     Who  struck  me  ? 
Nani  aliyekuita  ?     Who  called  you  ? 

The  particles  -po,  -mo,  and  -ko,  are  treated  as  Relatives. 
-Po  represents  when,  at  which,  and  where,  of  a  place  near  at 
hand ;  -mo  denotes  within  which  ;  and  -ko,  whither ;  whence \ 
and  where,  of  a  place  far  off. 


THE  IMPERATIVE  AND  StJBjUNCTIVE.  $5 

Aukapolazama,  when  he  shall  look.     Tulimokaa,  within  which  wt  sat 
Ninakotoka,  whence  I  come  out. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

When  I  shall  see  him.  When  the  foreigner  fell.  Whither  the 
European  is  returning.  When  the  date  tree  will  bear.  Where  we  are 
standing.  Whence  the  black  men  ran  away.  The  chamber  in  which 
he  sat  down.  Where  the  fishermen  overturned  our  canoe.  Where  the 
chief  went  by.  When  the  old  man  sKall  get  up.  Who  saw  me  ?  Who 
is  coming  out  ? 


THE  IMPERATIVE  AND  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

The  Imperative  has  only  two  forms,  which  are  those  of 
the  second  person,  singular  and  plural.  They  consist  of  the 
simple  form  of  the  verb  in  the  singular,  to  which  «/"-  is  added 
to  form  the  plural 

Penda,  lovt,  Pendani,  love  ye, 

In  Zanzibar  the  final  -a  of  the  verb  is  almost  always  changed 
into  -e. 

Pende,  love.  Pendeni,  love  ye. 

The  Subjunctive  is  formed  by  changing  the  final  •&  into  •*, 
and  prefixing  the  proper  sign  of  person. 

Nipende,  that  I  may  love.  Tupende,  that  we  may  love-. 

Upende,  that  you  (thou)  may  love.  Mpende,  that  you  may  love. 

Apende,  that  he  (or  she)  may  love.  Wapende,  that  they  may  love. 

Upende,  that  it  (mti)  may  love.  Ipende,  that  they  (miti)  may  love. 

Kipende,  that  it  (kitu)  may  love.  Vipende,  that  they  (vitu)  may  love. 

The  Subjunctive  is*  used  for  the  Imperative,  and  seems  to 
be  a  somewhat  more  polite  form. 

Vuta,  pull.  Nitazame,  let  me  look. 

Uvute,  please  to  putt.  Atazame,  let  him  look. 

It  is  also  used  with  the  sense  of  Am  I  {Is  he,  etc.'}  to  do 

this  or  that  ? 

Nipite,  Am  I  to  pass  f  Achimbe,  Is  he  to  dig? 

Niukate,  Am  I  to  cut  it  (mti)  down  f       Tuvuke,  Shall  we  cross  over  f 

In  English  the  purpose  with  which  a  thing  is  done  is  often 


l6  SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 

expressed  by  the  words  to  or  and.     In  Swahili  the  purpose 
is  always  expressed  by  the  Subjunctive. 

Call  the  starts  to  help  you.    Waita  watumwa  wakusayidie. 
Go  and  look  for  him.     Enenda  umtafute. 

Verbs  ending  in  -e,  -;",  or  -u,  do  not  change  their  final 
letter  in  the  Subjunctive. 

Unisamehe,  pardon  me.  Unisadiki,  believe  mt. 

Unijibu,  answer  me. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

Call  the  man  who  beat  you,  that  I  may  see  him.  Beat  him  that  he 
may  fear.  I  have  seen  the  man  whom  you  killed,  am  I  to  bury  him  ?  I 
shall  accuse  him,  that  I  may  annoy  you.  Tell  him  to  answer  me.  I 
beg  you  to  believe  me.  We  have  agreed  to  bathe  together.  Break 
those  cooking-pots.  Are  we  to  break  these  knives ?  Break  [pi.]  them 
[the  knives]  all.  Take  care  of  these  children.  Carry  [pi.]  these  loads. 
Choose  one  man  to  climb  up.  Cook  these  sweet  potatoes.  Collect 
those  sweet  potatoes  that  I  may  cook  them.  Tell  him  to  cover  the 
cooking-pot.  Destroy  [pi.]  all  the  huts.  We  have  divided  the  things 
which  you  ordered  us  to  destroy.  What  are  we  to  do  ?  Let  the  slave 
drag  the  long  poles.  Let  the  slave  women  draw  the  water.  Drive  the 
blind  man  away.  Let  the  deaf  man  stay.  He  wants  you  to  help  him. 
He  will  return  to  judge  the  bad  men.  Pick  up  the  spear  which  the 
drunken  chief  threw  to  kill  me.  I  tried  to  kick  him.  They  came 
near  to  the  tree  to  climb  up  it.  I  followed  in  order  to  hinder  them. 
He  took  off  his  clothes  to  bathe.  The  people  ran  away  that  they 
might  escape.  The  chief  sent  two  slaves  to  search  for  me.  I  turned 
to  uncover  the  cooking-pot.  The  thief  arrived  to  get  the  umbrella ; 
my  two  interpreters  went  back  to  binder  him.  We  three  went  down 
to  guard  the  hut. 


THE  KA-  TENSES. 

The  force  of  the  Conjunction  and  is  very  often  given  in 
Swahili  by  the  use  of  a  tense  formed  with  -ka-. 
With  the  Imperative,  ka-  is  simply  prefixed. 

Katupa,  and  throw  away.  Karudi,  and  come  back. 

With  the  Subjunctive,  -ka-  follows  the  sign  of  the  person. 

Wakarudi,  and  let  them  come  back, 
Akaangalie,  and  let  him  take  care. 


THE  KA-  TENSE.  2f 

To  express  the  past  tense  preceded  by  ana\  a  tense  is 
formed  by  the  personal  prefix  followed  by  -ka-, 

Nikaanguka,  and  I  fell  down. 
Ukaanguka,  and  you  (thou)  fell  down. 
Akaanguka,  and  he  (or  she)  fell  down. 
Ukaanguka,  and  it  (v&\)  fell  down. 
Kikaanguka,  and  it  (kitu)/£//  down. 

Tukaanguka,  and  we  fell  down. 
Mkaanguka,  and  you  fell  down, 
Wakaanguka,  and  they  fell  down. 
Ikaanguka,  and  they  (mid)  fell  down. 
Vikaanguka,  and  they  (vitu)  fell  down. 

In  telling  a  story,  the  -ka-  tense  is  used  almost  universally 
after  the  first  verb,  which  is  generally  in  the  -li-  tense.  The 
chief  exceptions  are  where  a  verb  is  joined  with  a  relative 
particle,  or  used  participially. 

Alijibu  akamwambia,  he  answered  and  said  to  him. 

Alirudi  akafika  hapa,  he  returned  and  got  as  far  as  this  (arrived  here). 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

And  go  out  [pi.].  And  call  her.  And  buy  it  [pole].  And  buy 
them  [poles].  And  drive  them  away  [people].  And  let  him  take  it 
n<nife].  Go  and  help  him.  Answer  me  and  take  care.  He  went 
before  and  arrived.  He  passed  and  he  returned.  He  asked  me  and 
I  told  him.  She  asked  you  and  you  told  her.  Hear  [ye]  and  answer 
me.  You  [pi.]  looked  and  saw  the  trees.  I  looked  for  the  knife  and 
found  it.  The  slaves  found  your  umbrella  which  you  left  and  brought 
it,  and  I  told  them.  The  owner  will  come  back  ;  and  they  said  to  me, 
This  man  knows  him.  The  foreigners  arrived  and  burnt  our  town. 
The  European  caught  my  spear  and  broke  it,  and  I  struck  him,  and 
he  said  to  the  men  who  followed  him,  Kill  that  man  ;  and  I  ran  away 
and  escaped.  He  put  on  his  new  shoes  and  they  hurt  him.  I  became 
tired  and  my  feet  swelled.  The  chief  called  his  men  and  said  to  them, 
This  old  man  is  a  wizard,  hold  him,  and  bind  him.  And  they  bound 
him.  And  the  men  who  guarded  him  got  drunk  and  slept,  and  I 
unfastened  him  and  he  ran  away.  And  the  men  awoke  and  said,  The 
wizard  has  escaped.  And  they  searched  for  him.  And  they  met  with 
me,  and  they  said  to  me,  You  remember  the  man  we  bound  ?  And  I 
said  to  them,  Which  man  ?  And  they  said  to  me,  That  wizard  ;  he  has 
run  away,  our  chief  will  beat  us.  And  I  said  to  them,  I  will  show 
you  his  town,  follow  me  and  you  will  find  him  ;  and  I  went  before  and 
they  all  followed.  And  we  met  with  you  and  you  said  to  us,  Go  back, 
the  old  man  has  cheated  you.  The  child  fell  down  and  cried,  Ha 


28  SWAH1LI   EXERCISES. 

showed  me  his  sore  and  I  cured  it.  I  turned  and  looked.  I  took  the 
sweet  potato  and  tasted  it.  They  got  drunk  and  quarrelled.  He  got 
up  and  sang.  You  [pi.]  were  sorry  and  I  rejoiced.  He  waited  and 
I  passed. 

THE  -KI-    TENSE. 

The  case  that  something  is,  or  is  being  done,  whether 
actual  or  supposed,  is  expressed  by  a  tense  formed  by  the 
personal  prefix  and  the  syllable  -ki-.  In  English  this  tense 
is  represented  by  a  great  number  of  forms.  Frequently  by 
the  present  participle. 

Nalimwona  akioga,  I  saw  him  bathing. 
Frequently  by  if. 

Abdallah  akija  mwambia,  If  Abdallah  comes,  tell  him, 
Frequently  by  when. 

Akirudi  nitamwona,  when  he  comes  back  I  shall  see  him. 
Sometimes  by  since,  ox  because. 

Alciwa  mtu  mkuu,  siwezi  neno,  since  he  is  a  great  man,  I  cam  do 
nothing. 

Any  other  form  in  English  in  which  a  state  of  things  is 
expressed  must  be  translated  into  Swahili  by  the  use  of  the 
•ki-  tense. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

If  the  tree  falls.  When  the  tree  falls.  Suppose  the  tree  should  fall. 
Though  the  tree  fall.  While  the  tree  is  falling.  Though  I  look.  If 
you  look,  you  will  see  the  black  men  running  away.  When  the  chief 
arrives,  we  will  tell  him.  When  the  knife  cuts  his  ringer,  the  child 
will  cry.  When  he  brings  the  book,  I  shall  be  able  to  read.  If  he 
brings  a  book  which  I  know.  When  I  hear  you  speaking,  I  will 
answer  you.  I  hear  them  calling  you.  On  arriving,  ask  [pi.]  him. 
In  going  back,  take  care.  If  you  strike  me,  take  care.  Supposing  he 
should  kill  you,  I  will  kill  all  his  children.  If  his  wife  kills  me  he  will 
forgive  her.  If  you  love  your  children,  beat  them.  If  you  love  me, 
forgive  them.  If  the  deaf  man  hears  you,  tell  him.  When  you  bring 
the  blind  man  we  will  beat  him.  Look  [pi.]  for  the  thieves  ;  when  you 
find  them,  bring  them.  When  he  asks  me,  you  answer  him.  If  I  hear 
him  when  he  calls,  I  shall  go  back.  If  I  see  her  looking,  I  shall  bide 


CONDITIONAL  TENSE.  39 

the  water-jar.  When  you  see  the  baobab  tree,  you  have  arrived  there* 
I  see  the  caravan  porters  running  away ;  they  are  leaving  their  burdens  ; 
the  strangers  as  they  find  them  take  them.  If  we  delay  we  shall 
prosper.  When  I  go  back,  go  back  all  of  you.  If  we  go  back,  let 
us  go  back  together.  The  hut  is  falling ;  if  we  go  out  we  shall  escape. 
Though  he  run,  I  shall  pass  him.  If  the  hut  is  destroyed,  build  another. 
If  he  makes  a  canoe,  break  [pi.]  it.  If  he  recollects,  we  will  pay  him. 
If  he  brings  a  spear,  we  will  break  it.  If  the  cook  cooks  good  food, 
we  will  praise  him.  If  he  destroys  good  food,  I  shall  beat  him. 
When  she  breaks  the  water-jar,  she  will  fear.  While  bathing  he  sank. 
The  European  saw  him  sinking,  and  ran  away.  As  he  lifted  his  hand, 
the  knife  fell ;  in  falling  it  cut  him. 

%*  The  words  in  italics  are  not  expressed  in  Swahili. 


CONDITIONAL  TENSE. 

Where  something  would  have  happened  if  something  else 
had  happened,  both  branches  of  the  contingency  are  repre- 
sented by  a  tense  formed  by  the  prefix  -ngali-,  preceded  by 
the  proper  sign  of  the  person.  The  condition  on  which  the 
contingency  would  have  occurred  is  often  marked  by  the  use 
of  the  word  kama,  if  or  as. 

Mti  ungalianguka,  the  tree  would  have  fallen. 

Kama  ningalikuona  nfngalikupiga,  If  I  had  seen  you,  I  should  have 
beaten  you. 

The  accent  is  always  placed  on  the  personal  prefix,  and 
never  on  either  syllable  of  the  tense  prefix,  -ngali-. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

If  I  had  heard  him,  I  should  have  feared.  If  the  knife  had  fallen, 
it  would  have  cut  me.  If  you  had  told  the  chief,  he  would  have  killed 
them.  You  would  have  burnt  his  hut.  You  [pi.]  would  have  burnt 
their  huts.  If  their  canoes  had  gone  back,  we  should  have  escaped. 
The  spear  would  have  passed  him.  The  drunkard  would  have  killed 
his  child.  If  she  had  looked,  his  wife  would  have  seen  him.  If  he 
had  taken  care,  his  wife  would  have  come  back.  I  saw  him  as  he 
passed,  and  you  said  to  me,  He  has  made  a  canoe.  And  I  said  to  him, 
This  man  says,  you  have  made  a  canoe,  I  want  to  look  at  it.  And 
he  said  to  me,  If  you  had  asked  my  slaves,  they  would  have  shown  yon 
my  canoe.  And  I  said  to  him,  Show  me  yourself.  And  I  saw  it,  and 
I  wondered.  }f  you  [pi.}  had  seen  it  you  would  have  wondere^, 


SWAHILI   EXERCISES, 


THE  NEGATIVE  TENSES. 

In  Swahili  the  negative  of  the  verb  is  made  by  the  use  of 
a  special  set  of  prefixes,  and  in  one  tense  by  a  change  in  the 
termination  of  the  verb. 

The  negative  personal  prefixes  are — 

/_«„/_,  Si-.  We— not— t  Hatu-. 

You  (than)  — not — ,  Hu-.  You — not — ,  Ham-. 

He  (or  she)  — not — ,  Ha-.  They— not — ,  Hawa-. 

//  (mti)  — not — ,  Hau-.  They  (miti)  — not — ,  Hai-. 

//  (kitu)  —not—,  llaki-.  They  (vitu)  —not—,  Havi-. 

These  prefixes  are  used  in  forming  the  Negative  Present, 
Past,  Future,  and  Conditional  Tenses,  and  the  Not  yd 
Tense. 

In  the  Imperative  and  Subjunctive,  and  with  particles  of 
Relation,  -si-  is  used  in  both  numbers  and  with  all  persons. 

Negative  Present. — The  Negative  Present  is  formed  by 
changing  the  final  -a  of  the  verb  into  -/,  and  prefixing  the 
negative  prefixes. 

Sipendi,  /  do  not  like.  Hatupendi,  We  do  not  like. 

Hupendi,  You  (them)  do  not  like.  Hampendi,  You  do  not  like. 

Hapendi,  He  (or  she)  does  not  like.  Hawapendi,  They  do  not  like. 

Haupendi,  //  (mti)  docs  not  like.  Haipendi,  77iey  (miti)  do  not  like. 

Hakipendi,  It  (kitu)  does  not  like.  Havipendi,  They  (vitu)  do  not  like. 

Verbs  which  do  not  end  in  -a  do  not  change  their  final 
vowel.  Is  or  are  not,  is  expressed  by  si,  for  both  number? 
and  all  classes  of  nouns. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

Our  chief  does  not  like  Europeans.  Europeans  do  not  like  our  medi- 
cine men.  Idle  slaves  do  not  like  an  overlooker.  The  river  does  not 
pass  those  baobab  trees.  I  do  not  see  our  men.  You  [pi.]  do  not  like 
me.  I  do  not  hate  you  [pi.].  She  is  not  reading.  The  canoes  are  not 
sinking.  You  are  not  taking  care.  These  are  writing,  those  are  not. 
I  said  to  him,  Which  man  is  it  whom  you  saw  ?  And  he  said  to  me,  I 
do  not  see  him.  He  is  not  teaching  my  children.  The  old  man  docs 
not  awake.  Their  children  are  not  crying.  Their  cocoa-nut  trees  arc 
not  bearing.  My  date  tree  is  bearing,  yours  are  not  [your  date  tree:; 
are  not  bearing]  He  does  not  like  that  harpoon.  Those  masts  arc 


THE  NEGATIVE  TENSES.  3! 

falling.  His  canoe  is  not  sinking.  He  is  not  destroying  your  hut  I 
do  not  forget  your  actions.  He  does  not  forgive  me.  They  do  not 
answer  us.  You  do  not  believe  him.  He  does  not  consider.  They  do 
not  order  you.  I  do  not  praise  them.  I  am  not  going  back.  He  does 
not  scorn  us.  You  do  not  suppose.  We  are  not  travelling.  I  do  not 
wonder.  They  do  not  worship  God.  These  slaves  are  not  idle. 


Negative  Past. — The  Negative  past  is  made  by  the  use 
of  the  tense  prefix  -£#-,  preceded  by  the  proper  negative 
personal  signs,  see  p.  30. 

Mimi  sikuanguka,  I  did  not  fall  down. 
Mti  haukuanguka,  the  tree  did  not  fall  down. 
Sisi  hatukuanguka,  we  did  not  fall  down. 
Vibanda  havikuanguka,  the  huts  did  not  fall  down, 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

I  did  not  accept.  We  did  not  agree.  I  did  not  answer.  The  chiefs 
did  not  arrive.  The  Europeans  did  not  buy.  The  cook  did  not  build. 
You  [pi.]  did  not  buy.  Those  women  did  not  draw  water.  The  six 
Europeans  did  not  get  drunk.  The  chief  did  not  go  before.  The  old 
man  did  not  refuse.  The  arrow  did  not  hit  him.  They  did  not  bring 
the  two  bedsteads.  The  Europeans  did  not  cut  down  the  cocoa-nut 
trees.  The  Europeans  did  not  kill  six  hippopotamus.  The  interpreter 
did  not  show  me  the  islands.  The  strangers  did  not  build  huts.  I  did 
not  taste  the  onions.  We  did  not  tear  the  rag.  I  did  not  tell  the  old 
man.  This  mason  did  not  use  many  poles.  The  cowards  did  not  fear 
the  slave  woman.  The  masons  did  not  want  red  umbrellas.  The  slave 
did  not  hate  her.  The  books  did  not  arrive.  He  did  not  boast.  They 
did  not  see  the  four  black  slaves. 

The  -ku-  tense  is  used  only  of  an  action  that  is  strictly 
and  entirely  past.  Where  the  meaning  is  that  something 
has  not  been  and  is  not,  the  present  is  used. 

He  has  not  delayed,  hakawii.  He  has  not  prospered,  hafanikiwi. 

He  has  not  got  drunk,  halewi. 

Where  the  meaning  is  that  something  has  not  happened 
as  yet,  it  is  expressed  by  the  tense  prefix  -/«-,  preceded  by 
the  proper  negative  personal  prefix. 

Hajafika,  he  has  not  yet  come. 
Sijamwona,  /  have  not  yet  seen  him. 
Hajaisha  (or  hajesha),  he  has  net  yet  finished. 


J3  SWAHILI  EXERCISES. 

Tlie  word  bado  is  often  added.  It  seems  to  imply  that 
the  event  is  one  likely  to  happen,  only  it  has  not  yet  come 
to  pass. 

Sijamwona  bado,  I  have  not  seen  him  \but  I  think  I  shall}. 

Hajasikia  bado,  he  has  not  heard  [but  he  will}. 

Hajafika  bado,  he  has  not  arrived  [though  fie  is  on  the  way}. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

The  foreigner  has  not  yet  cut  the  loaf.  The  nurse  has  not  yet  fed 
the  children.  They  have  not  yet  brought  the  two  bedsteads.  I  have 
not  yet  seen  the  book.  He  has  not  fastened  the  chain  [as  yet].  The 
chiefs  have  not  paid  me  [as  yet].  They  have  not  yet  passed  the  children. 
The  date  tree  has  not  yet  borne.  The  Europeans  have  not  yet  cut  down 
the  cocoa-nut  trees.  The  idle  cook  has  not  yet  rubbed  the  lid.  The 
fishermen  have  not  brought  the  canoe  [as  yet]. 

Negative  Future  and  Conditional. — The  Negative 
Future  is  made  by  merely  prefixing  the  negative  personal 
signs  in  place  of  the  ordinary  affirmative  prefixes. 

Nitapenda,  I  shall  love.  Atapenda,  he  will  love. 

Sitapenda,  I  shall  not  love.  Hatapenda,  he  will  not  love. 

Utapenda,  you  will  love.  Tutapenda.  we  shall  love. 

Hutapenda,  you  will  not  love.  Hatutapenda,  we  shall  not  love. 

The  Negative  Conditional  is  formed  in  the  same  manner 

Ningalipenda,  I  should  have  loved. 
Singalipenda,  1  should  not  have  loved. 
Tungalipenda,  we  should  have  loved. 
Hatungalipenda,  we  should  not  have  loved. 
Ingalianguka,  they  (trees)  would  have  fallen. 
Haingalianguka,  they  would  not  have  fallen. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

He  will  not  go  back.  We  shall  not  see  him.  We  should  not  have 
seen  him.  If  you  had  not  arrived  he  would  not  have  seen  us.  Our 
chief  will  not  like  those  Europeans.  The  Europeans  would  not  have 
liked  our  medicine  men.  Idle  slaves  would  not  have  liked  a  sharp  over- 
looker. You  [pi.]  will  not  see  our  men.  Europeans  would  not  have 
slept.  Black  men  would  not  have  fled.  The  canoes  would  not  have 
been  broken.  These  cocoa-nut  trees  would  not  have  borne.  They  would 
not  have  ordered  you.  He  will  not  forgive  me.  We  shall  not  travel. 
The  old  man  will  not  go  back.  Those  simpletons  will  not  answer  as. 
{  should  not  have  loved  him.  I  should  not  have  told  you, 


THE  NEGATIVE  TENSES.  33 

Negative  Subjunctive. — The  Negative  Subjunctive  is 
formed  by  inserting  -si-  between  the  personal  sign  and  the 
verb ;  in  other  respects  it  resembles  the  subjunctive  affirma- 
tive. It  expresses  an  intention  or  desire,  the  object  of  which 
is  that  somebody,  or  something,  may  not  do  or  be  whatever 
the  verb  expresses.  It  is  also  used  of  a  purpose  which  fails, 
and  is  the  usual  Negative  Imperative.  The  true  Negative 
Imperative  is  formed  when  necessary  by  prefixing  -si  to  the 
affirmative  form,  but  it  is  only  rarely  employed. 

Asipende,  let  him  not  love — that  he  may  not  love — without  his  faring, 

though  we  desired  it, 
Isianguke,  that  they  [the  trees]  may  not  fall. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

Let  us  not  see.  Let  him  not  go  back.  That  the  chief  may  not  tell 
us.  Do  not  look.  Do  not  look  [pi.].  Do  not  tell  him.  Beat  him 
that  he  may  not  do  [it].  Do  not  speak,  that  they  may  not  hear  [lest 
they  hear].  Tell  them  not  to  look  for  it  [book].  Let  us  not  pass  it 
[tree].  Hold  the  child  that  she  may  not  fall.  Hide  the  books  that 
they  may  not  read.  Tell  them  not  to  listen.  I  will  go  back  that  I  may 
not  meet  with  them.  Do  not  pull  [pi.].  Tell  the  porters  not  to  carry 
these  two  burdens.  Do  not  take  my  spear.  Do  not  bum  my  hut. 
Do  not  [pi.]  make  him  a  chief.  Do  not  get  drunk.  Take  care  the 
knife  does  not  cut  your  finger.  Take  care  not  to  strike  that  European. 
Do  not  praise  the  slave  girls.  Do  not  bring  the  book,  I  do  not  know 
[how]  to  read.  Do  not  speak,  lest  I  answer  you.  If  you  kill  him,  do 
not  kill  his  children. 


Negative  with.  Relatives. — There  is  one  negative  form 
which  is  used  with  the  particles  of  relation  for  all  tenses. 
It  is  made  by  inserting  -si-  between  the  personal  sign  and 
the  sign  of  relation. 

Asiyependa,  [/if]  who  does  not,  did  not,  or  will  not  love. 
Tusiokupenda,  [we]  who  do  not,  did  not,  or  will  not  love  you 
Tusiyekupenda,  [you]  whom  we  do  not,  etc.,  love. 
Nisiouona,  [the  tree]  which  I  do  not,  did  not,  or  shall  not  see. 
Usiyetuambia,  [thou\  who  didst  not,  dost  not,  or  wilt  not  tell  us, 

For  the  signs  of  relation  see  pp.  22,  23 


34  SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 

The  prefixes  standing  alone  express  who  is,  amt  or  are 
not,  who  was,  were,  will,  or  shall  not  be. 

Nisiye,  [  /]  who  am  not,  etc. 
Usiye,  [you,  thou\  -who  are  not,  etc. 
Wasio,  \they\  who  are  not,  etc. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

A  shadow  which  is  not  passing.  Slave  women  who  are  not  carrying 
water-jars.  A  man  who  will  not  throw  a  spear.  I  saw  three  men, 
whom  you  did  not  see.  [You]  who  will  not  see  the  spear,  will  pass  the 
hut.  [They]  who  do  not  know  him.  [I]  who  did  not  know  him.  The 
trees  which  did  not  fall  did  not  crush  your  hut.  The  chair  which  was 
not  broken.  Simpletons  who  will  not  run  away.  The  European  who  has 
not  crossed  the  river.  The  Europeans  who  do  not  cross  the  river.  The 
servants  who  do  not  like  sweet  potatoes.  The  tree  which  does  not  bear 
fruit.  The  sick  people  who  do  not  wonder.  The  medicine  man  who 
will  not  cure  them  all.  The  simpletons  who  will  not  pay  the  wizard 
who  has  not  cheated  them.  The  chief  who  does  not  love  his  wife. 
The  chief  who  did  not  love  his  children.  The  cook  who  did  not 
cook  my  food.  The  good  food  which  did  not  kill  us. 


NEGATIVE  PARTICIPIAL  TENSE. 

The  Negative  of  the  -ki-  tense  is  expressed  by  the  use 
of  the  negative  -si-  with  the  relative  particle  -po-,  when. 

Asipopenda,  he  not  loving,  or  not  having  loved. 

All  the  English  forms  expressed  in  the  affirmative  by  the 
-ki-  tense  may  be  expressed  negatively  in  Swahili  by  using 
-po  as  a  negative  relative,  and  that  for  past  and  future  time 
as  well  as  the  present 

If  he  does  not  love. 
If  he  has  not  loved. 

Asipopenda  {    Wfun  ^  ^  ^  Of  ^  ^  ^^ 

Since,  because,  though,   etc.,  he  does,  did,   or  will  not 
love. 

The  syllable  -po-  being  used  strictly  as  a  relative  particle, 
all  the  rules  given  above  for  the  use  of  relatives  with  a 
negative  apply  to  this  case. 


THE  PASSIVE  VOICE,  35 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

If  he  does  not  love  you,  I  shall  not  love  him.  If  they  do  not  go  out,  the 
chief  will  not  come  in  [enter].  If  he  will  not  come  near  himself,  bring 
him  [pi.].  If  I  do  not  wait,  I  shall  not  get  his  knife.  If  the  bone  is 
not  broken,  the  arm  will  get  well.  Though  the  European  did  not  kill 
the  cook,  he  will  not  please  the  black  people.  If  you  do  not  beat  you* 
child,  he  will  scorn  you. 

THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 

The  Passive  is  formed  by  inserting  -zv-  before  the  final 
-a,  -f,  or  -/,  of  the  regular  verb.  In  all  other  respects  it  is 
the  same  as  the  Active. 

Napenda,  /  love,  Ninapendwa,  /  am  being  loved. 

Ninapenda,  I  am  loving.  Nimependwa,  I  have  been  loved. 

Nimependa,  I  have  loved,  Nalipendwa,  I  was  loved, 

Nalipenda,  /  loved.  Nitapendwa,  /  shall  be  loved. 

Nitapenda,  /  shall  love.  Nipendwe,  let  me  be  loved. 

Nipende,  let  me  love,  Ningalipendwa,  I  should  have  been 
Ningalipenda,  I  should  have  loved.        loved. 

Nikipenda,  if  I  love.  Nikipendwa,  if  I  am  loved. 

Nikapenda,  and  I  loved.  Nikapendwa,  and  I  was  loved. 

Sipendi  I  do  not  love.  Sipendwi,  I  am  not  loved. 

Sikupenda,  I  did  not  love.  Sikupendwa,  /  was  not  loved. 

Sitapenda,  I  shall  not  love.  Sitapendwa,  I  shall  not  be  loved. 
Singalipenda,   /  should  not  have    Singalipendwa,  /  should  not  Aait 

loved.  been  loved. 

Nisipende,  that  I  may  not  love.  Nisipendwe,  that   1  may  not  be 
Nisiyependa,  /  who  do  not  love.  loved. 

Sijapenda,  /  have  not  yet  loved.  Nisiyependwa,  /  who  am  not  loved, 

Napendwa,  1  am  loved.  Sijapendwa,  I  am  not  yet  loved. 

Verbs  ending  in  -c,  -/,  and  -u,  and  those  ending  in  -oa. 
and  -ua,  have  special  passive  forms  which  will  be  mentioned 
hereafter.  In  the  last  two  cases  the  cause  lies,  no  doubt,  in 
the  difficulty  of  distinguishing  between  -ua  and  -ttwa,  -oa 
and  -owa.  The  verbs  which  do  not  end  in  -a  are  all  Arabic 
words,  and  therefore  more  or  less  irregular. 

By,  after  a  passive  verb,  is  expressed  by  na. 

Nalipigwa  na  mfalme,  I  was  beaten  by  the  chief, 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

I  was  beaten ;  you  were  not  beaten.  He  will  be  beaten  by  *  sla  T*. 
Let  them  be  beaten.  That  I  may  not  be  beaten.  The  old  man  will  be 


30  SWAHILI  EXERCISES. 

bitten.  The  spear  was  brought.  The  two  huts  are  being  built.  The 
chief  is  not  yet  buried.  The  slave  girls  are  being  called.  Let  the 
canoe  be  taken  care  of.  The  Europeans  will  not  be  conquered. 
The  food  has  been  cooked.  The  town  has  been  entered  by  the  four 
foreigners.  The  door  would  have  been  fastened.  I  am  not  feared. 
The  children  have  not  yet  been  fed.  I  did  not  hide  the  spears ;  they 
have  been  hidden  by  the  owners.  If  I  had  told  him,  I  should  not  be 
liked  by  the  Europeans.  Where  has  the  piece  been  placed  ?  The 
•wizard  is  not  pleased.  You  will  not  be  remembered.  Your  chief  will 
not  be  remembered  by  our  children.  The  looking  glass  has  not  yet 
been  given  back.  Let  the  hut  be  swept  by  a  slave  woman.  Let  not 
the  children  be  taught  by  a  European.  I  was  told  by  his  slave.  The 
spear  was  thrown  by  the  chief. 


ADVERBS. 

Adverbs  in  Swahili  follow  the  words  they  qualify. 
Sema  sana,  speak  loud.  Mzuri  sana,  -very  beautiful. 


LIST  OF  ADVERBS. 


Above,  up,  on  the  top,  etc.,  juu. 

After,  afterwards,  behind,  etc., 
baada,  baadaye  [time}  nyuma 
{place]. 

Again,  tena. 

Altogether,  utterly,  entirely,  quite, 
kabisa. 

Always,  sikuzote. 

flefore,  in  front,  etc.,  mbele. 

Below,  at  the  bottom,  chini. 

Certainly,  without  a  doubt,  yakini. 

Even,  hatta. 

Exactly,  halisi. 

Ear,  far  off,  mbali. 

Fast,  quickly,  upesi. 

Formerly,  long  ago,  zamani. 

Gently,  moderately,  slowly,  pole- 
pole. 

Gratis,  for  nothing,  idly,  burre. 

Immediately,  marra. 

Inside,  within,  «V.,ndanL 

Lastly,  :n\visho. 

Merely,  only,  etc.,  tu. 


More,  zayidi. 

More  than,  zayidi  ya. 

Near,  karibu. 

Now,  sasa. 

Now  directly,  sasa  hivi. 

Often,  marra  nyingi. 

Otitside,  without,  etc.,  'nje. 

Possibly,  yamkini. 

Presently,  afterwards,  then,   ulii' 
mately,  halafu. 

Quickly,  hastily,  hima. 

Safely,  salama. 

Suddenly,  unexpectedly,  ghafala. 

Truly,  in  truth,  sincerely,  kweli. 

Very,  sana.     Sana  is  used  to  in- 
tensify  any  verb   or  adjective, 
and  may  be  very  variously  trans- 
lated into  English : — 
Vuta  sana,  pull  hard. 
Sema  sana,  speak  out. 
Penda  sana,  love  much. 

Well,  properly,  thoroughly,  vema. 

Wonderfully,  ajabu. 


PREPOSITIONS.  37 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

I  have  bought  a  very  handsome  spear.  He  does  not  see  well.  I  do 
not  much  like  idle  slaves.  I  saw  him  coming  back  fast.  I  should  not 
have  built  a  very  large  hut.  I  looked  behind  and  saw  two  foreigners. 
I  heard  a  man  near  singing  loudly  [sana],  and  I  thought,  this  is  a 
European,  I  will  run  away  [flee]  fast.  The  chief  is  above,  [and]  the 
slaves  below.  I  saw  a  man  looking,  and  I  told  you,  He  sees  us  now, 
and  you  said  to  me,  He  is  looking  outside  ;  we  are  inside.  Let  us  pass 
gently  that  he  may  not  hear  us ;  possibly  we  shall  escape ;  and  we  passed. 
And  presently  another  man  came  out,  and  I  said,  Truly  we  cannot  [kuweza, 
to  be  able]  escape  ;  and  you  said,  He  is  only  a  slave,  he  cannot  hinder  us ; 
and  we  passed  him.  I  have  often  remembered  those  two  people  ;  they 
would  at  once  have  killed  us  both,  if  they  had  known  us.  The  children 
went  before  in  front,  the  men  followed  the  children,  and  last  followed 
the  old  men. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

There  are  in  Swahili  only  four  true  Prepositions — na,  -a, 
kwa,  and  katika. 

Na  is  with,  along  with,  and  by  of  the  agent  after  a  passive 
verb.  See  p.  72,  na  with  a  pronoun. 

-a,  of,  see  p.  19. 

Kwa  denotes  instrumentality  and  object — with,  of  an 
instrument ;  for,  by,  of  means ;  to,  of  a  person,  or  of  the 
place  of  his  residence ;  after  the  manner  of,  etc. 

Katika  is  used  of  place  in  all  its  relations,  at,  in,  to,  from, 
into,  and  out  of;  also  of  an  action,  during,  in,  or  while. 

Other  Prepositions  are  freely  made  from  adverbs,  etc.,  by 
the  use  of  na  and  -a. 

Pamoja  na,  together  with.  Nyuma  ya,  after  [at  the  back  of}, 

Karibu  na,  near  [near  with],  Mbele  ya,  before  [in  front  of\. 

A  noun  or  a  verb  may  be  made  into  an  adverb  by  pre- 
fixing kwa-,  and  then  by  the  addition  of  -a  the  whole  becomes 
a  Preposition. 

Sababu,  cause.  Kwa  sababu  yc,  because  of. 

Kwa  sababu,  because  [by  cause}. 

The  force  of  the  Preposition  in  English  is  very  generally 
contained  in  Swahili  in  the  verb. 

Knniletea,  to  bring  to  me,  Kumnunulia,  to  buy  for  him. 


SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 


COMPOUND  PREPOSITIONS. 

Above,  on  the  top  of,  upon,  juu  ya.  For,  instead  of,  in  place  of,  mahalJ 

After  [of  time],  baada  ya.  pa. 

After,    behind,    at    the    back    of,  Inside  of,  -within,  ndani  ya. 

nyuma  ya.  Near  to,  karibu  na,  karibu  ya. 

Amidst,  inthe  middle  of, kztikztiyo..  Outside  of,  nje  ya. 

because,  kwa  sababu  ya.  Over,  juu  ya. 

before,  in  front  of,  mbele  ya.  Since,  tangu. 

Below,  beneath,  at  the  bottom  of,  So  far  as,  up  to,  till,  hatta. 

wider,  chini  ya. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

It  [hut]  was  made  of  poles.  I  see  a  man  standing  on  the  canoe.  And 
he  received  it  [kitu]  with  [his]  two  hands.  I  bought  the  spear  foi  an 
old  rag.  He  will  return  from  the  town.  I  met  with  him  in  the  town. 
Return  [pi.]  to  your  chief.  He  remained  upon  the  tree.  And  he  came 
down  from  the  tree,  and  he  passed  till  he  met  with  his  two  fellow  slaves 
upon  another  tree.  And  they  arrived  at  the  bottom  of  the  hill.  All 
the  slaves  followed  behind  the  chief.  And  he  went  before  with  his 
slaves  into  the  island.  I  went  back  to  my  companions,  and  we  saw  the 
owner  in  his  canoe,  and  we  said  to  him,  come  down  [shuka]  out  of  your 
canoe  ;  and  he  answered,  Well,  and  let  us  follow  our  chief  quickly,  we 
shall  find  him  in  the  town.  And  I  said  to  him,  he  has  not  yet  arrived 
in  his  town ;  and  he  said  to  us,  he  is  now  arriving. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

The  verbs  in  Swahili  very  frequently  express  what  in 
English  is  denoted  by  a  Conjunction.  The  -ka-  tenses 
(p.  26)  give  the  force  of  and,  but,  or  any  other  word  used 
merely  as  a  connective.  If,  and  any  other  words  used  to 
introduce  a  statement  or  a  supposition,  are  expressed  by  the 
•ki-  tense  (p.  28).  In  order  that,  and  all  other  words  de- 
noting purpose  or  object,  are  expressed  by  the  use  of  the 
Subjunctive.  Thus  a  Conjunction  is  very  seldom  used  in 
Swahili  immediately  before  a  verb. 

LIST  OF  CONJUNCTIONS. 

Also,  na  [and],  tena  [again]. 

Although,  kwamba. 

And,  na.    Before  a  negative,  wala  is  used 'instead of "na, 


CONJUNCTIONS.  39 

H 

And  2,  nami.    And  we,  naswi. 

And  thou,  nawe.     And  you,  nanyi. 

And  lie  or  she,  naye. 

^4«</  #,  [mti]  nao,  [kitu]  nacho. 

And  they,  [watu]  nao,  [mitij  nayo,  [vitu]  navyo. 
Both  —  and  — ,  na  —  na  — . 
But,  lakini  {however},  ilia  [but  ON!}'],  illakini  [except  however], 

wallakini  [nor  however]. 
Either  —  or  — ,  ao  —  ao  — ,  ama  —  ama  — . 
Except,  ilia. 
For,  kwani. 

However,  lakini,  beginning  the  clause. 
If,  kwamba, 
In  order  that,  illi. 
Neither  —  nor  — ,  wala  —  wala  — . 
That  [how  that],  kama,  kwamba. 
Then,  baadaye  [afterwards],  kiisha  [this  finished]. 
Till,  hatta. 

Too,  na.     /  too,  etc.,  see  And  I,  etc. 
Whether,  kwamba,  kama. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

A  youth  and  an  old  man  followed  me  into  the  town.  But  the  old 
man  stood  at  the  door  with  a  spear,  and  I  said  to  him,  When  did  you 
arrive  ?  where  have  you  got  that  spear?  and  he  did  not  answer  me,  and  I 
asked  him  again.  Immediately  I  saw  also  the  youth,  and  I,  I  asked 
him,  Where  has  this  old  man  got  that  spear  ?  And  he  said  to  me,  Ask 
him  himself.  And  I  said  to  him,  I  have  asked  him,  but  he  does  not 
answer  me.  And  he  said  to  me,  Perhaps  he  did  not  hear  you ;  speak 
loud.  And  I  spoke  loud,  and  the  old  man  said,  I  [am]  a  deaf  person  ; 
I  hear  you  speaking  only ;  forgive  me.  And  I  said  to  him,  And  you, 
forgive  me,  I  did  not  know.  And  I  asked  him  again,  speaking  loud. 
And  he  said  to  me,  I  bought  it.  And  I  said  to  him,  When  ?  And  the 
youth  said  to  me,  Either  he  stole  [iba]  it,  or  he  picked  it  op  in  the 
mountains.  And  the  old  man  said  to  him,  What  do  you  say  ?  And 
the  youth  said,  He  heard  you,  and  he,  if  he  had  truly  bought  it,  he  would 
have  answered  you  at  once.  And  I  said  to  him,  This  [is]  an  old  man, 
and  possibly  he  has  forgotten.  And  he  said  to  me,  He  has  not  forgotten  ; 
but  we,  the  people  of  this  town,  we  know  him  well ;  [he  is]  a  thief  this, 
since  [he  was]  a  child.  And  I  said  to  him,  What  has  he  stolen  ?  And 
he  said  to  me,  Many  things ;  this  [man  is]  a  stranger ;  he  was  driven  away 
out  of  his  town  by  his  chief,  till  now  he  is  staying  in  our  town ;  and  we 
do  not  like  him,  but  we  have  not  driven  him  away,  because  [he  is]  a 
wizard,  and  they  the  people  fear  him.  And  I  wondered,  hearing  him, 
and  I  said,  I  do  not  believe  that  this  [man  is]  a  wizard  ;  you  [are]  all 
cowards,  and  you  fear  a  shadow.  And  he  said  to  me,  I  do  not  fear  him, 
for  I  think  our  medicine  men  are  able  to  conquer  him.  And  I  said  to 


40  SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 

the  old  man,  Have  you  heard  us  ?  And  he  said  to  me,  I  [am]  a  deaf 
man,  I  only  hear  you  talking ;  but  do  not  believe  him  if  he  tells  you 
that  I  was  driven  away  from  my  town  by  our  chief.  I  was  not  driven 
away,  and  I,  I  shall  go  back.  If  I  had  been  driven  away,  the  people 
of  this  town  would  not  have  accepted  me  that  I  should  stay  in  their 
town.  And  I  said  to  him,  Either  you  are  not  a  deaf  man,  or  certainly  he 
has  said  truly  you  [are]  a  wizard.  And  the  old  man  said  to  me,  I  do 
not  hear.  And  I  turned  and  went  put  from  the  town,  and  I  have  not 
told  [any]  man  except  you ;  but  I  believe  that  the  old  man  [was]  neither 
a  deaf  man,  nor  a  wizard,  but  a  cunning  man,  who  had  stolen  the 
spear,  and  wished  to  cheat  me;  but  I  too,  I  know  [how]  to  cheat 
people. 


OTHER  CLASSES  OF  NOUNS. 

The  other  Classes  of  Nouns  of  most  importance  are  those 
which  do  not  change,  to  form  the  plural,  and  those  which 
form  their  plural  by  prefixing  ma-.  The  remaining  three 
are  of  less  importance ;  they  are  those  which  begin  in  the 
singular  with  u-  or  w-,  the  infinitives  of  verbs  used  as  sub- 
stantives, and  the  one  word  mahali,  place.  As  the  rules  in 
regard  to  these  two  last  are  very  simple,  they  may  each  be 
despatched  in  a  single  article. 

Place, — The  formative  syllable  appropriate  to  the  word 
mahali  is  -/a-,  and  as  it  belongs  exclusively  to  this  word  its 
mere  presence  is  enough  to  show  that  place  is  the  substantive 
referred  to,  so  that  the  word  mahali  may  often  be  omitted. 

1.  Adjectives  are  made  to  agree  with  mahali  by  prefixing 
fa-. 

Mahali  papana,  a  broad  place. 

When  followed  by  -ۥ  or  -/'-,  the  -a-  coalesces  with  it  into 
the  sound  of  •€-. 

Mahali  peusi,  a  black  place. 

For  lists  of  Adjectives  see  pp.  3,  16,  17. 

2.  This  place  and  yonder  place  are  formed  on  the  syllable 
-pa-:  hapa,  this  place  or  here  ;  pale,  that  place  or  there. 

3.  The  signs  of  person  and  object  in  connection  with 
place  are  both  -pa-. 

Panipendeza,  it  pleases  int.  Napaoia,  T  see  it. 


INFINITIVES  OF  VERBS.  41 

4.  The  initial  syllable  of  the  Interrogative  and  Personal 
Pronouns  \spa-,  varying  as  mentioned  above  (i). 

Mahali  papi  ?     Which  place  ?  Mahali  pangu,  my  place. 

Mahali    pangapi?      How    many    Mahali  petu,  our  place  or  placet, 
places? 

5.  The  sign  of  the  possessive  case  is  pa. 

Mahali  pa  Abdallah,  Abdallali's  place. 

6.  All  is  pote- ;  having,  penyi ;  itself,  penyewe. 

Mahali  pote  penyi  miti,  all  places  with  trees. 

7.  The  Relative  particle  answering  to  maJiali  is  -po-.     It 
often  has  the  sense  of  where. 

Nilipopaona,  which  I  saw. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

I  saw  the  place  where  the  fisherman  stood  when  \-ki-  tense]  their  new 
canoe  sank.  I  passed  the  place  itself.  I  saw  a  place  where  there  were 
[having]  many  huts.  Suleman  arrived  in  your  place,  and  I  asked  him, 
Where  did  you  leave  Abdallah ;  tell  me  the  place.  And  he  told  me  the 
place  in  the  town,  where  his  elders  [old  persons]  lived  before.  And  I 
said  to  him,  I  do  not  know  it.  And  he  told  me,  Where  you  saw  him,  in 
crossing  the  river.  And  I  remembered  the  place,  fit  was  a]  beautiful 
[one]  near  the  river.  And  I  said  to  him,  now  I  remember  it ;  we  saw 
it  together,  [it  is]  a  beautiful  place.  And  he  said  to  me,  [it  is] 
beautiful. 

INFINITIVES   OF  VERBS. 

Infinitives  may  always  be  used  in  Swahili  as  verbal  sub- 
stantives expressing  the  act  of  doing  or  becoming,  or  the 
state  of  being,  what  the  verb  describes. 

Kufa,  dying  or  becoming  dead.  Kupigana,  fighting. 

Kustirika,  being  covered. 

Adjectives  and  pronouns  are  brought  into  agreement  by 
the  use  of  the  syllable  -ku-. 

Kufa  kuzuri,  a  noble  death. 

Kupigana  si  kwema,  fighting  is  not  good. 

Kuogopa  huku,  this  fearing. 

Kuja  kwake  kumenipendeza,  his  coming  has  pleased  me. 

Hakukunipendeza  kukimbia  \sKdaot  your  running  away  didnotpleast 

me. 
Nimekujua  kulewa  kwako,  I  know  of  your  getting  drunk. 


42  SWAHILI    EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

Accepting.  Accusing.  Agreeing.  Altering.  I  do  not  like  beating 
you.  Answering  often.  Bearing  fruit  much.  Seeing  and  believing. 
Boasting  is  not  good.  Boiling  quickly.  Bringing  is  not  taking.  Her 
cooking  [is]  beautiful.  Crying  will  harm  you.  By  [means  of]  cultivat- 
ing. While  dancing.  By  digging  deep  [sana].  By  beautiful  dreaming 
and  bad  doing.  The  idle  slave  annoys  me  much  by  his  delaying.  They 
brought  the  trees  by  dragging.  He  escaped  because  of  fearing.  I  saw 
them  while  [in]  fighting.  Forgiving  and  forgetting. 

THE  MA-  CLASS. 

Nouns  which  make  their  plural  by  prefixing  ma-  have  no 
prefix  in  the  singular  unless  the  roots  are  monosyllabic, 
when  they  prefix  //-,  or  begin  with  a  vowel,  when  they  ordi- 
narily prefix  /-.  There  are  many  nouns  beginning  with  ma~ 
which  are  seldom  or  never  used  in  the  singular. 


LIST  OF  SUBSTANTIVES  OF  THE  MA-  CLASS. 


Machukio,  abhorrence,  disgust 

Shauri,  mashauri,  advice. 

Jambo,  mambo,  affair,  thing,  cir- 
cumstance. 

Mapenzi,  affection,  love. 

Maagano,  agreement. 

Mapatano,  agreement. 

Koonde,  makoonde,  a  slave's  allot- 
ment. - 

Lozi,  malozi,  an  almond. 

Talasknu,  matalasimu,  an  amulet. 

Mazumgumzo,  amusement,  con- 
versation. 

Tibu,  majibu,  an  answer. 

Tao,  matao,  an  arch. 

Kwapa,  makwapa,  the  armpit. 

lifu,  majifu,  ashes. 

Makusanyiko,  assembly,  place  of 
assembly. 

Shoka,  mashoka,  an  axe. 

Kanda,  makanda,  a  long  narrow 
matting  bag. 

Peto,  mapeto,  a  small  square 
matting  bag. 


Fungu,  mafungu,  a  bank,  a  shoal. 
Ganda,  maganda,  bark,  rind. 
Pipa,  mapipa,  a  barrel. 
Bakuli,  mabakuli,  a  basin. 
Fakacha,     mapakacha,    a    basket 

plaited  out  of  fresh  cocoanut  leaves. 
Ungo,   maungo,  a  flat  basket  for 

sifting. 
Tuta,   matuta,   a   raised  bed  for 

planting  sweet  potatoes. 
Tumbo,  matumbo,  belly,  entrails, 

•womb. 
Lengelenge,      malengelenge,      a 

blister. 

Jipu,  majipu,  a  boil. 
Chupa,  machupa,  a  bottle  [in  the 

Mombas  dialect,  tupa,  rnatupa]. 
Kasha,  makasha,  a  large  box,  a  chest. 
Tawi,  matawi,  a  branch,  a  butuk 

of  fruit. 

Gari,  magari,  a  carnage,  a  cart. 
Korosho,  makorosho,  a  cashew  nut. 
Bibo,  mabibo,  a  cashew  apple. 
Zizi,  mazizi,  a  cattle  pen. 


THE  MA-  CLASS. 


Kapi,  makapi,  chaff. 

Kanisa,  makanisa,  a  church. 

\Vingu,  mawingu,  a  cloud. 

Kuti,  makuti,  a  leaf  of  the  cocoanut 
tret. 

Dafu,  madafu,  a  cocoanut  in  the 
proper  stage  for  drinking 

Makumbi,  cocoanut  fibre. 

Agizo,  maagizo,  commission^  direc- 
tion. 

Matumaini,  confidence. 

Shaka,  mashaka,  doubt. 

Tone,  matone,  a  drop. 

Vumbi,  mavumbi,  dust. 

Sikio,  masikio,  an  ear. 

Yayi,  mayayi,  an  egg. 

J  icho,  macho,  an  eye. 

Kosa,  makosa,  a  fault. 

Konde,  makonde,  a  fat. 

Ua,  maua,  a  flower. 

Inzi,  mainzi,  a  fly, 

Tunda,  tnatunda,  fruit. 

Tawa,  matawa,  a  frying  fan. 

Tango,  matango,  a  gourd  eaten 
like  cucumber. 

Kaburi,  makaburi,  a  grave,  a  tomb. 

Jembe,  majembe,  a  hoe. 

Tundu,  matundu,  a  hole. 

Gote,  magote,  the  knee. 

Fundo,  mafundo,  a  knot. 

Maneno,  language. 

Jani,  majani,  a  leaf. 

Soko,  masoko,  market,  bazaar. 

Jaravi,  majaravi,  coarse  matting. 


Maziwa,  milk. 

Jina,  majina,  name. 

Shingo,  mashingo,  the  neck. 

Kasia,  makasia,  an  oar. 

Mafuta,  oil. 

Chungwa,  machungwa,  an  orange. 

Kafi,  makafi,  a  paddle. 

Papayi,  mapapayi,  apapaiu, 

Kokoto,  makokoto,  a  small  piece  of 

stone,  a  pebble. 
Manukato,  perfumes. 
Nanasi,  mananasi,  a  pine  apple. 
Shimo,  mashimo,  a  pit. 
Shamba,  mashamba,  a  plantation, 

apiece  of  ground  in  the  country. 
Sufuria,  masufuria,  a  large  metal 

pot. 

Boga,  maboga,  a  pumpkin. 
Majuto,  regret,  repentance. 
Tanga,  matanga,  a  sail. 
Jiwe,  mawe,  a  stons. 
Jifya,  mafya,  stones  to  set  a  pot  on 

over  afire. 
Jua,  the  sun. 
Jino,  meno,  a  tooth. 
Mumunye,  mamumunye,  vegetal^ 

marrow. 
Dau,  madau,  a  small  vessel  sharp 

at  both  ends. 
Mashairi,  verses. 
Maji,  -water. 
Tikiti,    matikiti,    a    wild    water 

melon. 
Neno,  maneno,  a  word. 


Adjectives  [Ma-  class]. — Adjectives,  including  the 
variable  numerals,  beginning  with  a  consonant  (p.  3)  are 
made  to  agree  with  nouns  of  the  ma-  class  by  omitting  all 
prefix  in  the  singular,  and  prefixing  ma*  in  the  plural 


Sufuria  tupu,  an  empty  pot. 
Mawe  makubwa,  large  status. 


Yayi  bovu,  a  rotten  egg. 
Maji  matamu,  sweet  water. 


Adjectives  beginning  with  a  vowel  (p.  16)  prefix/-  to  form 
the  singular,  and  ma-  to  form  the  plural.  The  -a-  of  the 
prefix  ma-  coalesces  with  i  or  e  to  form  a  long  e. 


44  SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 

Shaori  jerevu,  cunning  advice.        Dafu  jingine,  another  cocoanut. 
Maganda  meusi,  black  bark.  Madafu  mengi,  many  cocoanuts. 

Mavazi  meupe,  white  dresses. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

A  bad  affair.  Great  affection.  Ripe  almonds.  A  sharp  answer. 
A  wide  arch.  Dry  ashes.  A  heavy  axe.  Thick  barks.  A  small 
barrel.  A  sound  basin.  Long  raised  beds  for  sweet  potatoes.  Large 
blisters.  New  boils.  Empty  bottles.  A  heavy  chest.  A  sweet  cocoa- 
nut  for  drinking.  A  large  drop.  Long  ears.  Rotten  eggs.  New 
faults.  Savage  flies.  Sweet  fruits.  An  empty  grave.  A  small  hole. 
Fine  language.  A  long  leaf.  Short  leaves.  A  broad  mat.  Raw 
milk.  A  beautiful  name.  A  long  neck.  Heavy  oars.  Sweet  oranges. 
Fine  perfumes.  A  large  plantation.  Beautiful  verses. 

A  soft  knee.  A  narrow  hole.  Another  grave.  Many  graves 
Much  [many]  water.  A  red  fruit.  Long  red  fruit.  Slender  flies 
Different  faults.  Black  eyes.  Light  eyes.  A  red  eye.  A  white  egg. 
Light  dust  [pi.].  Many  doubts.  A  small  narrow  dau.  Good  con 
fidence.  Good  red  bottles.  A  light  basin.  A  good  axe.  Good  light 
axes.  Cunning  answers.  Good  almonds.  Easy  affairs. 

Demonstratives  [Ma-  class]. — The  pronominal  sylla- 
bles answering  to  substantives  of  the  ma-  class  are  //  in  the 
singular  and  ya  in  the  plural. 

The  Demonstratives  are  made  as  explained  on  pp.  5,  6, 
and  are  hili  and  tile,  hay  a  and  yale. 

Kasha  hili,  this  chest.  Makasha  haya,  these  chests. 

Kasha  lile,  that  chest.  Makasha  yale,  those  chests. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

This  large  chest.  Those  large  metal  cooking  pots.  These  gourds 
[matango].  Those  long  ears.  This  small  fault.  That  hole.  These 
knees.  These  light  drops.  Those  bitter  doubts.  This  large  eye. 
These  large  teeth.  This  large  raw  egg.  That  raw  egg.  Those  bottles. 
These  commissions.  These  boils.  Those  four  large  barrels.  These 
dry  ashes.  These  five  arches.  That  answer.  These  white  almonds 
This  good  advice.  These  new  circumstances.  That  sweet  water 
These  sharp  axes.  That  sharp  axe.  That  barrel.  This  barrel. 

Which  ?  [Ma-  class]. — The  Interrogative  which  1  is 
formed  by  prefixing  the  pronominal  syllables  to  the  in- 
variable -pi. 

Jaabo  lipi  ?  Which  matttr  ?        Mambo  yapi  ?  WTiich  matters  f 


THE  MA-  CLASS.  45 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

Which  bottles ?  Which  chest?  Which  ear?  Which  eggs?  Which 
eye?  Which  fruits?  Which  hole?  Which  pit?  Which  knee?  Which 
barrels?  Which  axe?  Which  oars?  Which  shoal?  Which  water? 
Which  oil  ?  Which  arch  ?  Which  tooth  ? 

Personal  Pronouns  [Ma-  class]. — The  pronominal 
syllables  may  be  used  alone  to  represent  the  present  tense 
of  the  verb  to  be. 

Kasha  li  zito,  the  chest  is  heavy. 
Makasha  ya  mazito,  the  chats  are  heavy. 

The  same  syllables  form  the  personal  prefix  to  the  verb. 
See  pp.  7,  8,  10. 

Dafu  limeanguka,  the  cocoanut  has  fallen. 
Madafu  yameanguka,  the  cocoanuts  have  fallen. 

They  are  also  used  as  objective  prefixes  to  mark  the 
object  of  the  verb.  See  p.  14. 

Wapagazi  hawakulichukua  kasha,  the  porters  did  not  carry  the  chest. 
Wapagazi  hawakuyachukua  makasha,  the  porters  did  not  carry  the  chests. 

Before  a  vowel  the  vowels  of  the  prefix  disappear.  See 
pp.  1 6  and  18. 

Jicho  lataka  kuoshwa,  the  eye  wants  to  be  washed. 
Macho  yataka  kuoshwa,  the  eyes  want  to  be  ivasfied. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

I  have  accepted  the  advice.  These  circumstances  do  not  agree.  You 
will  not  alter  the  agreement.  The  ashes  annoy  me.  The  matting  bags 
[kanda]  have  arrived.  The  water  is  boiling.  He  has  broken  the  basin. 
Bring  [pi.]  six  barrels.  Who  has  built  the  tomb?  Let  us  break  the 
axe.  Buy  ten  eggs.  Do  not  break  the  eggs.  Let  them  take  care  of 
the  frying  pan.  The  women  will  carry  the  water  in  water-jars.  I  like 
to  chew  this  sweet  bark.  They  have  not  cleaned  the  matting.  We 
collected  the  oranges.  Our  cook  will  cook  the  pine-apples.  Cover  the 
metal  pot.  They  have  crushed  the  almonds.  Are  we  to  cut  the  blister? 
The  milk  is  decreasing.  The  slaves  tried  to  defend  the  cattle  pen.  Are 
we  to  divide  the  papaws,  or  the  cashew  nuts  ?  They  emptied  out  the 
oil.  The  chief  did  not  enter  the  pit.  You  will  find  the  two  pumpkins 
at  the  door.  They  forgot  to  bring  the  oars,  they  brought  only  two 
paddles.  If  they  had  hoisted  the  sail,  they  would  haTe  escaped.  If 
they  had  not  hoisted  the  large  sail,  they  would  not  have  sunk.  We 
are  looking  for  the  wild  water  melons  ;  have  you  s«en  them  ? 


46  SWAHILI    EXERCISES. 

Possessive  Pronouns  and  Case  [Ma-  class]. — The 
preposition  of  is  made  to  agree  with  ma-  nouns  by  the  use 
of  the  initials  /-  and  y-.  See  p.  19. 

The  same  initials  mark  the  agreement  of  the  Possessive 
Pronouns.  See  p.  1 9. 

Kasha  la  Ali,  Alts  cJiest,  Jina  lake,  his  name. 

Kasha  langu,  my  chest.  Majina  yake,  his  names. 

Makasha  ya  Ali,  AKs  chests.  Jina  lao,  their  name. 

Makasha  yangu,  my  chests.  Majina  yenu,  your  names, 

Similarly,  all  is  lote  in  the  singular,  andjvte  in  the  plural. 
Having,  etc.,  is  lenyi  and  yenyt\  itself  is  lenyewe,  and  them- 
selves, yenyewe.  Seep.  21. 

All  the  boxes,  makasha  yote. 

The  whole  box,  kasha  lote. 

The  basin  with  eggs,  bakuli  lenyi  mayayi. 

The  basins  with  eggs,  mabakuli  yenyi  mayayi, 

The  tooth  itself,  jino  lenyewe. 

The  teeth  themselves,  meno  yenyewe. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

I  took  the  European's  axe.  I  shall  see  the  chiefs  plantation.  You 
will  hurt  the  old  man's  eye.  I  have  found  the  drunkard's  paddle.  We 
have  passed  the  European's  grave.  I  see  the  white  ashes  of  a  great  fire. 
They  are  burning  the  deaf  man's  pine-apples.  The  chief's  slaves  took 
the  fisherman's  paddles.  The  slave's  knee  struck  the  stranger's  eye. 
They  have  hidden  the  canoe's  sail.  The  old  man's  neck.  The  stranger's 
regret.  The  idle  slave's  belly.  The  porters'  agreement.  The  cook's 
metal  pot.  The  nurse's  affection.  The  children's  teeth.  The  blind 
man's  advice  [pi.].  The  mangouste's  ear.  The  mangouste  has  bitten 
the  child's  armpit.  The  European's  answer. 

Our  chief  has  destroyed  your  plantation.  The  Europeans  have  cut 
their  cocoanut  leaves.  My  fruit  [is]  ripe.  His  axe  [is]  sharp.  His 
arrow  struck  my  neck.  They  liked  their  oranges.  Our  arch  has  fallen. 
Your  slave  girls  took  my  frying  pan.  Your  vegetable  marrows  please 
me.  The  old  man  wants  my  amulet.  My  tooth  is  paining  me.  My 
ajce  is  touching  the  tree.  I  see  its  hole.  I  carried  his  oranges.  Your 
boil  [is]  large.  You  will  take  our  perfumes.  I  shall  leave  your  carriage. 
Their  conversation  has  pleased  me.  You  [pi.]  will  hate  our  flies.  GUI 
people  like  papaws.  He  has  hidden  my  milk.  Your  verses  [are]  many. 
Our  milk,  your  [pi.]  water,  and  their  oil.  My  abhorrence,  your  affec- 
tion, and  their  regret.  Our  agreement  is  not  yet  ended.  My  blister  is 
not  your  boil. 

All  affairs.    All  amusement.     The  answer  itself.    The  barrels  them- 


THE  MA-   CLASS.  47 

selves.  The  barrels  with  water.  The  barrel  with  oiL  The  raised  bed 
with  sweet  potatoes.  All  boils  hurt  me.  Bring  all  the  basins.  The 
ear  itself.  Break  all  the  leaves  and  bring  all  the  fruit.  Language 
having  faults. 

The  Relative  [Ma-  class]. — The  Relative  particles 
answering  to  the  ma-  class  are  lo  in  the  singular,  and  yo  in 
the  plural.  See  pp.  22-25,  and  33. 

Pipa  lo  lote,  any  barrel  whatever. 
Mapipa  yo  yote,  any  barrels  whatever. 
Jino  linalouma,  the  tooth  which  is  aching. 
Jino  lililouma,  the  tooth  which  achtd. 
Jino  litakalouma,  tlu  tooth  which  will  ache. 
Meno  yanayouma,  the  teeth  which  are  aching. 
Meno  yaliyouma,  the  teeth  which  ached. 
Meno  yatakayouma,  the  teeth  which  will  ache. 
Sufuria  nililolinunua,  the  pot  I  bought. 
Masufuria  niliyoyanunua,  the  pots  I  bought. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

The  disgust  which  I  feel  [see].  The  advice  which  I  received.  The 
circumstances  which  annoyed  me.  The  agreement  which  we  made,  you 
and  I.  The  almonds  which  were  picked  up.  The  answer  which  he 
will  give  [put  out].  The  arch  which  is  falling.  The  ashes  which  he  is 
scattering.  The  axe  which  will  cut  [down]  that  tree.  The  barrels  which 
the  chief's  people  carried.  The  basin  which  I  broke.  The  blister 
which  pained  me.  The  boil  which  was  visible.  The  cart  which  they 
are  drawing.  The  church  which  we  are  building  in  the  town.  The 
confidence  which  the  slaves  will  feel  (see).  The  flies  which  are  annoy- 
ing me.  The  oil  which  you  are  pouring.  The  pit  which  you  dug. 
The  perfumes  which  you  bought  The  pine-apples  which  are  being 
cooked.  The  wild  water  melons  which  the  children  are  looking  for. 
The  sail  which  they  hoisted. 

Negative  Tenses  [Ma-  class]. — The  negative  prefixes 
answering  to  ma-  nouns  are  kali-  in  the  singular  and  haya- 
in'  the  plural.  In  the  Negative  Subjunctive,  the  prefixes 
become  list-  and  yasi-.  See  pp.  29-33. 

Tone  halianguki,  the  drop  does  not  fall. 

Matone  hayaanguki,  drops  do  not  fall. 

Tanga  halikushushwa,  the  sail  was  not  lowered. 

Matanga  hayakushushwa,  the  sails  were  not  Icnvtrsd. 

Jino  halitauma,  the  tooth  will  not  ache, 

Meno  hayatauma,  the  teeth  will  not  ache. 


48  SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 

Yayi  lisioze,  that  the  egg  may  net  go  bad. 

Mayayi  yasioze,  that  the  eggs  may  not  go  bad. 

Boga  lisilopikwa,  the  pumpkin  -which  was  not  cooked. 

Maboga  yasiyopikwa,  the  pumpkins  -which  were  not  cooketL 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

Our  chief  does  not  like  these  almonds.  These  circumstances  do  not 
annoy  me.  This  axe  does  not  cut.  These  amusements  do  not  please 
me.  His  answer  does  not  suffice.  The  barrel  is  not  sinking.  The  eye 
does  not  hear.  The  ear  does  not  see.  Pumpkins  do  not  fly.  Vege- 
table marrows  do  not  cry. 

The  basin  did  not  arrive.  The  axe  did  not  hurt  me.  The  amulet 
did  not  harm  him.  Their  amulets  did  not  guard  them.  The  bitter  bark 
did  not  cure  you. 

The  affair  is  not  yet  finished.  The  bitter  bark  has  not  as  yet  cured 
you.  The  drop  has  not  yet  fallen.  The  eggs  are  not  yet  cooked.  The 
water  has  not  boiled  as  yet.  The  leaf  has  not  yet  got  dry. 

A  sharp  answer  will  not  drive  him  away.  The  pine-apples  will  not  go 
bad.  These  verses  will  not  please  him  much.  Your  verses  will  not 
please  the  chief.  Hard  language  will  not  kill  us.  Regret  will  not  pay 
me.  The  sails  will  not  touch  the  mast. 

Let  not  the  eggs  go  bad.  That  the  oranges  may  not  fall.  That  the 
pumpkins  may  not  be  cooked.  That  the  fruit  [pi.]  may  not  be  crushed. 
That  the  ashes  be  not  taken  care  o£,  [Do]  not  [let]  the  eggs  fall. 


THE  N-  CLASS. 

Substantives  which  have  n-  or  ny-  for  a  prefix  do  not 
change  to  form  the  plural. 

Nyumba,  a  house.  Ndoo,  a  bucket. 

Nyumba,  houses.  Ndoo,  buckets. 

The  letter  n  cannot,  however,  stand  before  any  letters 
except  J,  g,j,y,  and  z.     Before  b  and  v  it  becomes  m. 

Mbaya  stands  for  nbaya  {bad}.  Mvua  stands  for  nvua  \rain\, 

When  prefixed  to  w  the  two  letters  become  mb. 
Mbili  stands  for  nwili  [two], 

When  prefixed  to  /  or  r  they  become  /& 

Xdimi  stands  for  nlimi  [tongues].  Ndefu  stands  for  nrefu  [tong] 

When  n  ought  to  be  prefixed  to  k,  p,  or  t,  it  is  not  written, 


THE  N-  CLASS. 


49 


but  the  letters  get  a  sort  of  explosive  sound,  which  may  be 
heard  in  such  words  as  — 

K'uku,  /0rnkuku,  a  fowl.  P'epo,/0r  npepo,  -winds, 

T'aka,_/0rntaka,  dirt. 

Before  vowels  the  prefix  takes  the  form  ny~. 
Nyekundu,  for  nekundu,  red. 

These  rules  make  it  difficult  to  know  what  Substantives 
ought  to  be  reckoned  as  belonging  to  the  n-  class.  The 
difficulty  is  increased  by  the  custom  of  putting  foreign  words 
into  this  class,  whatever  their  form. 

It  is  a  good  general  rule  for  a  beginner  to  reckon  as 
belonging  to  this  class  all  nouns  as  to  which  he  is  uncertain 
how  to  class  them.  He  will  very  often  be  right,  and  the 
only  mistake  he  can  make  in  the  noun  is  to  omit  a  prefix, 
which  is  better  than  putting  a  wrong  one,  while  the  forms  of 
the  pronoun  are  sure  to  convey  his  meaning,  which  other 
forms  might  not. 

LIST  OF  N-  SUBSTANTIVES. 


Ilesabu,  accounts. 

Daftari,  account  book. 

Hewa,  air. 

Sadaka,  alms,  offering.** 

Amerikano,  American  sheeting. 

Nanga,  an  anchor. 

Hasira,  anger.  — 

Pembe,  angle,  corner. 

Nyama,  animal,  meat,  fash. 

Chungu,  ants.  , 

Siafu,  brown  ants  often  seen  ctoss- 

ing  the  path  in  great  numbers. 
Mchwa,  white  ants.  ' 

Nyani,  ape. 

Nguvu,  authority,  strength,  /flzwr. 
Tufe,  a  ball. 
Farumi,  ballast.  ,  . 
Ndizi,  bananas. 
Ng'ambo,  the  opposite  bank. 
Boriti,  roof  beam,  pole. 
Ndevu,  beard. 
Kengele,  bell. 


Jeneza,  bier.*- 
Damu,  blood. 
Ndoo,  bucket,  pail. 
Ngao,  buckler,  shield. 
Shughuli,  business,  engagement.  ** 
Siagi,  butter,  cream. 
Ulayiti,  English  unbleached  calico. 
Kaniki,  blue  calico. 
Shiti,  printed  calico. 
Galawa,  a  canoe. 
Kofia,  a  cap. 
Shehena,  cargo?" 
Zulia,  a  carpet. 
Khalfati,  caulking.  ^ 
.^Nasibu,  chance,  luck,  good  fortune. 
.  Sifa,  character,  praise. 
Nathari,  choice.  — 
Saa,  clock,  -watch,  hottr. 
Nguo,  cotton  cloth,  a  loin  cloth, 

clothes. 

Joho,  woollen  cloth,  an  Arab  coat. 
Garofuu,  cb:^s. 


50  SWAHIL4   EXERCISES. 

Rungu,  club.  Heshima,  honour,  respect. 

Nazi,  a  cocoanut  [when  ripe\  Nyumba,  a  house.  \ 

Kahawa,  coffee.  Sanamu,  image,  likeness,  idol, 

Rangi,  colour,  dye,  paint.  Safari,  a  journey,  voyage. 

I lali,  condition,  state.  Furaha,  joy. 

Sandarusi,  copal,  or  gum  animi,  Haki,  justice,  right. 

Shaba,  copper,  brass.  ^  Namna,  kind,  sort,  pattern* 

Pembe,  corner,  horn,  angle.  Ngazi,  a  ladder. 

Pamba,  cotton.  Taa,  a  lamp. 

Thiraa,  a  cubit,  about  half  a  yard.-~ gheria,  law,  rule. 

Dasturi,  custom.  Risasi,  lead. 

Tende,  dates.  Elimu,  learning,  doctrine. 

Siku,  day  [in  reckoning].  Barua,  letter,  note,  document. 

Deni,  debt.  Nuru,  light. 

Sitaha,  deck.  -  Chokaa,  lime. 

Tofauti,  difference.  «-"  Hasara,  loss,  damage, 

Shidda,  difficulty,  distress,  troublef"E.mbQ,  a  mango. 

Aibu,  disgrace,  reproach. '"'  Alama,  a  mark. 

Talaka,  divorce.  ''  Maana,  meaning. 

Ndoto,  dream."  Dawa,  medicine. 

Ngoma,  drumt  drumming,  music,  Fetha,  money,  silver. 

dance.  Imbu,  mosquito. 

Inchi  [Afombas,  nti],  earth,  land,  Sindano,  a  needle. 

country.  Habari  [pi.],  news. 

Raha,  east,  rest,  comfort.  Sauti,  noise,  voice,  sound. 

Bidii,  effort,  strong  attempt.  "  Pua,  the  nose. 

Njaa    [Mombas,    ndaa],    famine,  Hesabu,  number. 

hunger.  Asili,  origin,  nature,  substance. 

Hofu,/ear,  dread.  Karatasi,  paper. 

Tupa,  a  file.  Amani,  peace. 

Banderaj^/ffTf,  red  stuff.  "Lulu,  a  pearl. 

Nyama,_/2«/!,  meat,  animal.  Kalamu,  open. 

Nguvu,  force,  strength,  authority.  Nguzo,  pillar,  column,  post. 

Fayida,  gain,  profit,  advantage.  Sahani,  a  plate. 

Bustani,  a  garden.  Ncha,  point,  thin  end. 

Samli,  ghee,  clarified  butter.   ^-  Sumu,  poison. 

Zaw  adi,  a  gift,  especially  a    token  Thamani,  price,  value. 

remembrance.    »  Fayida,  profit. 

Tbahabu,  gold.  Ahadi,  promise. 

Njugu,  ground  nuti.  Robo,  a  quarter. 

Bunduki,  a  gun.  Mvua,  rain. 

Baruti,  gunpowder.  Dini,  religion,  -worship. 

Nusu,  half.  Haja,regutst,  desire. 

Leso,  handkerchief.  Mali,  riches,  property,  possessions 

Afya,  health,  good  health.  •''  Dzn,roof,  upper  floor. 

Ngama,  the  hold  of  a  ship.  •  Nafasi,  room,  space,  time,  fppor' 
Auli,  honey,  syrup.  tunity. 


ADJECTIVES  [N-  CLASS]. 


Kamba,  rope. 

Kutu,  rust. 

Parafujo,  a  scrtw, 

Bahari,  the  sea. 

Siri,  a  secret,  secnsy,  mystery 

Akili,  sense,  intellect,  wits. 

Haya,  shame,  modesty. 

Merikebu,  a  ship. 

Dalili,  sign,  mark,  evidence. 

Ishara,  sign,  signal. 

Ngozi,  skin,  hide,  leather. 

Ndui,  small  pox. 

Sabuni,  soap. 

Roho,  soul,  life, 

Nyota,  a  star. 

Hali,  state,  health,  circumstances. 

Fimbo,  a  stick. 

Meza,  a  table. 


Lami,  /ar. 

Durubini,  a  telescope. 
Hema,  a  tent, 
Kiu,  M/rtf. 

Handaki,  a  trench,  a  ditch. 
Hila,  a  trick,  stratagem,  device. 
Mboga  [pi.],  vegetables. 
Siki,  vinegar. 
Njia  [Mombas  ndia],  a/ay,  ra*/, 

means. 

Kabari,  a  wedge. 
Ngano,  wheat, 
Ajabu,  wonder,  a  wonder. 
Kazi,  work,  employment,  function, 
Jeraha,  a  wound. 
Dawati,  writing  desk. 
Foramali,  a  ship's  yard. 


ADJECTIVES   [N-  CLASS]. 

Adjectives  agreeing  with  Substantives  of  the  «  class  are 
formed  according  to  the  same  rules,  and  have  the  plural 
the  same  as  the  singular. 

Adjectives  beginning  with  a  vowel  [p.  16]  prefix  ny~. 

Nyumba  nyekundu,  a  red  house,  or  red  houses. 
Alaraa  nyekundu,  a  red  mark,  or  red  marks. 

Adjectives  beginning  with  a  consonant  [p.  3],  are  formed 
as  follows  : — 


•zuri,  beautiful,  fins  —  nzuri. 

•geni,  foreign,  strange  —  ngeni. 

-gumu,  hard  —  ngumu. 

-zito,  heavy  —  nzito. 

-dogo,  little  —  ndogo. 

-zima,    sound,    whole,  perfect  — 

nzima. 

-refu,  long  —  ndefu. 
-baya,  bad  —  mbaya. 
-bichi,  raw,  fresh  —  mbichi. 
-bivu,  ripe  —  mbivu. 
bcru,  rotten  —  mboTU. 


-tupu,  bare  empty  —  tupu. 
-chungu,  bitter  —  chungu. 
-pana,  broad  —  pana. 
-kuu,  chief,  great  —  kuu, 
-kavu,  dry  —  kavu. 
-chache,  few  —  chache. 
-kali,  fierce,  sharp  —  kali 
•kubwa,  great  —  kubwa. 
-fupi,  short  —  fupi. 
-tamu,  sweet  —  tamu. 
-nene,  thick  —  nene. 
-kukuu,  worn  out  -—  kukuo. 


5  a  SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 

Three  common  adjectives  are  more  or  less  irregular, 
-ema,  good,  makes  njema  or  ngema. 
-pya,  new,  makes  'mpya. 
-wazi,  open,  makes  wazi. 

The  variable  numbers  [N-  class]  are  formed  as 
follows  [see  p.  4] : — 

One,  moja.  Two,  mbili. 

Three,  tatu.  Four,  "nne. 

Five,  tanu.  Eight,  nane. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

Many  great  losses.  Two  ripe  mangoes.  A  black  mark.  White 
wlver.  One  mosquito.  Sharp  needles.  Good  news.  A  long  nose. 
Eight  letters.  Beautiful  pearls.  A  good  pen,  A  thick  pillar.  Sharp 
points.  Large  prices.  Three  quarters.  A  new  request.  Good  roofs. 
Much  space.  Many  opportunities.  Red  rust.  Long  screws.  Little 
[few]  sense.  A  plain  [open]  sign.  Large  hides.  Soft  soap.  Small 
stars.  A  bad  state.  A  long  stick.  Broad  tables.  White  tents.  A 
cunning  trick.  A  short  way.  Ripe  wheat.  A  fine  writing  desk. 
Heavy  anchors.  Three  corners.  Raw  flesh.  Great  [many]  authority. 
Sweet  bananas.  A  long  beard.  Black  blood.  Small  buckets.  A 
large  carpet.  A  good  character.  Heavy  clubs.  White  paint.  Six 
cubits.  Ten  days.  A  narrow  deck.  Many  dreams.  New  flags. 
Beautiful  gardens. 

Pronouns  [N-  class]. — The  pronominal  syllables  answer- 
ing to  the  n  class  are  /  in  the  singular,  and  zi  in  the  plural 

1.  These  syllables  standing  alone  represent  the  present 
tense  of  the  verb  to  be. 

Nyumba  i  kubwa,  the  house  is  large. 
Nyumba  zi  kubwa,  the  houses  are  large, 

2.  They  form  the  personal  and  objective  prefixes  to  the 
verb. 

Nyumba  imeanguka,  the  house  has  fallen  down. 
Nyumba  zimeanguka,  the  houses  have  fallen  down* 
Nimeinunua  nyumba,  I  have  bought  the  house. 
Nimezinunua  nyumba,  /  have  bought  the  houses. 

3.  Before  a  vowel  they  become  y-  and  z. 

Fayida  yapita  kiburi,  profit  surpasses  pride. 

Akili  zapita  mali,  understanding  [pi.]  surpasses  property, 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

Accounts  annoy  me.     Profit  pleases  me.     They  received  the  offer 


POSSESSIVES  [N-  CLASS].  53 

ings.  The  anchor  is  heavy.  He  struck  the  corner.  The  animals 
have  run  away.  He  is  looking  for  the  animals.  The  ants  [siafu]  have 
bitten  us.  The  white  ants  have  destroyed  the  account  books.  The 
roof  beams  are  long.  I  have  heard  the  bell.  Four  men  are  carrying 
the  bier.  The  blood  will  remind  me.  I  saw  the  two  empty  buckets. 
I  put  on  the  cap,  and  it  hurt  me.  And  the  clock  struck.  The  clothes 
want  to  be  fastened.  I  bought  the  cloves.  And  the  dream  was 
finished.  Hunger  is  hurting  me.  They  will  hoist  the  flag.  The  flag 
has  been  hoisted.  I  did  not  get  the  profit.  I  have  got  the  loss.  We 
hear  the  noise. 

Demonstratives  [N-  class]. — The  Demonstratives  are 
formed  from  the  pronominal  syllables  as  explained  at  p.  6. 
They  are  hii  and  tie,  hizi  and  zile. 

Nyumba  hii,  this  house.  Nyumba  hizi,  these  houses. 

Nyumba  ile,  that  house  yonder.         Nyumba  zile,  those  houses. 

The  interrogative  which  ?  [N-  class]  is  in  the  sin- 
gular ipi,  and  in  the  plural  zipi. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

The  house  [is]  large.  This  garden  [is]  little.  This  great  wonder. 
These  two  heavy  wedges.  This  sharp  vinegar.  Yonder  signal.  Which 
signals?  Those  dry  hides.  Those  beautiful  pearls.  These  sweet 
mangoes.  This  new  money.  Which  needles  ?  This  request.  These 
lamps.  Which  lamps  ?  These.  This  gunpowder.  Those  tents.  This 
country.  Which  bucket  ?  This  carpet.  Those  caps.  Those  houses. 
This  clock.  These  clothes. 

Possessives  [N-  class]. — The  preposition  of  is  made 
to  agree  with  nouns  of  the  n  class  by  using  y  in  the  singular 
and  z  in  the  plural  as  initial  letters. 

Nyumba  ya  Abdallah,  AbdallaVs  house. 
Nyumba  za  Abdallah,  Abdullah's  houses. 

The  same  letters  are  used  as  the  initials  for  the  possessive 
pronouns. 

Nyumba  yake,  his  house.  Nyumba  zake,  his  koustt. 

AH,  baring,  itself,  and  themselves,  are  formed  in  a  similar 


54  SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 

manner,  becoming  yote,yenyi,  an&yenyewet  in  the  singular — 
zote,  zenyi,  and  zenyewe  in  the  plural. 

All  the  house,  Nyumba  yote. 

All  the  houses,  Nyumba  zote. 

The  house  with  a  door,  Nyumba  yenyi  mlango. 

Houses  with  doors,  Nyumba  zenyi  milango. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

I  have  seen  his  accounts.  Show  me  your  account  book.  Abdallah's 
profits  pass  mine.  I  have  bought  all  his  bananas.  The  roof  beams 
of  my  house.  He  cut  the  old  man's  beard.  The  children  are  ringing 
[striking]  our  two  bells.  He  let  down  our  bucket  into  your  well 
Abdallah's  spear  struck  All's  shield.  Our  business  [pi.]  [is]  much. 
Mabruki  has  put  on  my  red  cap.  My  watch  [is]  good,  his  [is]  bad. 
His  cloth  is  torn.  Those  dates  [are]  mine.  Our  good  dreams.  Your 
[pi.]  files.  Your  [pi.]  lamps  are  burning.  I  did  not  accept  his  gold. 
I  have  not  yet  seen  your  ground  nuts.  We  do  not  worship  their  images. 
They  saw  your  [pi.]  tents.  1  do  not  hear  their  voices.  They  will  not 
get  their  request.  He  will  not  tell  me  his  secrets.  Do  your  work. 
The  medicine  man  is  not  able  [does  not  know]  to  cure  their  wounds. 

I  hate  all  presents.  All  presents  please  our  chief.  A  garden  with 
[having]  trees.  Tents  with  flags.  All  the  bananas  are  [have]  gone 
bad.  All  the  butter  has  melted. 

The  Relative .  [N-  class].  —  The  Relative  particles 
answering  to  the  n  class  are  -yo-  in  the  singular  and  -zo~ 
in  the  plural. 

The  house  which  fell,  nyumba  iliyoanguka. 

The  houses  which  fell,  nyumba  zilizoanguka. 

The  house  which  I  bought,  nyumba  niliyoinunua. 

77ie  house  I  did  not  buy,  nyumba  nisiyoinunua. 

See  pp.  22,  23,  and  33,  34. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

The  wound  which  I  cured.  The  wounds  which  I  did  not  cure.  The 
star  which  followed.  You  saw  the  work  which  they  did.  The  wheat 
which  will  be  ground.  The  wedge  which  our  man  put  under  the  door 
Avas  loosened.  The  vinegar  which  did  not  go  bad  was  spilt.  The 
trench  which  he  dug  in  his  plantation  reached  as  far  as  the  house  which 
you  bought  I  saw  the  signs  which  I  was  told  to  notice  [angalia].  His 
modesty  has  left  him.  Look  for  the  screws  we  saw  yesterday  [jana]. 
The  rust  which  is  visible  to-day  [leo]  was  visible  yesterday.  All  requests 
which  the  chief  shall  withhold  to-day,  I  will  hear  afterwards.  The 
room  which  I  wanted  would  have  sufficed  you.  The  rain  which  passed 


THE  U-  CLASS.  55 

over  our  roof  got  [entered]  into  the  new  house  which  they  are  building. 
The  promise  which  I  gave  [put  out].  The  chief  knew  the  trick  which 
deceived  the  foreigners.  The  money  which  the  fisherman  received 
[was]  much  [many].  I  shall  give  [put  out]  a  quarter  of  the  price  which 
the  mason  wants.  The  pillars  which  were  crushed  [were]  all  large. 
The  pearl  which  the  fisherman  brought,  we  have  never  seen  at  all 
[kabisa]. 

Negative  Tenses  [N-  class]. — The  Negative  prefixes 
referring  to  Nouns  of  the  n  class  are  hai-  in  the  singular  and 
Jiazi-  in  the  plural. 

Nyumba  yangu  haikuanguka,  my  house  did  not  fall  down. 

Nyumba  zile  mbovu  hazijaanguka  bado,  those  decayed  houses  have  net 

fallen  down  as  yet. 
Sindano  zetu  hazingalivunjika,  our  needles  -would  not  have  been  broken. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

All  the  money  would  not  have  been  spent.  His  accounts  did  not 
please  me.  This  profit  will  not  suffice  you.  This  air  will  not  cure  you. 
Their  alms  would  not  have  pleased  God.  The  .chiefs  anger  does  not 
harm  me.  The  sound  of  the  bell  did  not  annoy  me.  The  roof  beams 
did  not  rot.  The  canoe  has  not  yet  sunk.  The  clock  is  not  striking. 
The  clocks  have  not  yet  struck.  The  letter  does  not  arrive.  Your  [pi.] 
letters  did  not  arrive.  The  screw  is  not  entering.  The  nose  does  not  see. 

THE  U-  CLASS. 

Nouns  which  begin  in  the  singular  with  u  make  their 
plural  by  changing  u  into  n. 

This  rule  is,  however,  subject  to  many  exceptions  and 
modifications. 

1.  u-  before  a  vowel  becomes  w-. 

\Vembe,  a  razor.  \Vino,  ink* 

2.  Where  the  root  of  the  noun  begins  with  a  vowel,  the 
u-  of  the  singular  becomes  ny-  in  the  plural. 

Uimbo,  a  song.  Nyimbo,  songs. 

3.  Where  the  noun  in  the  singular  is  a  dissyllable,  the 
u-  is  retained  and  ny-  prefixed. 

Uma,  a  fork.  Nyuma,  _/&/&„ 

4.  The  letter  n  changes  and  is  changed  as  mentioned 
above,  p.  48. 


SWAHILI  EXERCISES. 


The  list  of  Substantives  is  not  numerous,  and  many,  being 
abstract  nouns,  have  no  plural.  In  the  following  list  the 
plurals  are  added  when  in  use. 


LIST  OF  SUBSTANTIVES  OF  THE  U-  CLASS 


Ukubali,  acceptance. 

Uzee,  old  age. 

Udevu,  a  hair  of  the  beard — ndevu, 

beard. 

Uzuri,  beauty. 
Uchungu,  bitterness. 
Upofu,  blindness. 
Upindi,  a  bow — pindi. 
Upana,  breadth. 
Ukingo,  brink. 
Ufagio,  a  broom — fagia. 
Utoto,  childhood. 
Ukucha,  a  claw,  a  nail — kucha. 
Ushujaa,  courage,  heroism. 
Ua,  a  court  yard — nyua. 
Wokovu,  deliverance. 
Umande,  dew. 
Uovu,  evil. 
Uso,  face — nyuso. 
Uwongo,  falsehood. 
Uoga,  fear. 
Ukali,  fierceness. 
Ukuni,  a  piece  of  firewood — kuni, 

firewood. 
Unga,  flour. 

Uayo,  foot  print — nyayo. 
Uma,  a  fork,  sting — nyuma. 
Upole,  gentleness. 
Wema,  goodness,  kindness. 
Wali,  cooked  grain. 
Uji,  gruel. 

Ufizi,  gum  of  the  teeth — fizi. 
Unyele,  a  hair — nyele,  the  hair. 
Ukufi,  handful — kufi. 
Uwingu,  heaven — mbingu. 
Uvivn,  idleness. 
Urithi,  inheritance. 
Wino,  ink. 
Upele,  large  pimplet*  itch. 

Utl    1_  •          *     1L 
Ushi,  joke. 


Ufunguo,  a  key — funguo. 

Ufalme,  kingdom,  kings/tip. 

Utambi,  a  lamp  ivick — tambi. 

Ukurasa,  leaf  of  a  book — kurasa. 

Urefu,  length. 

Umeme,  lightning. 

Unyonge,  meanness. 

\Vavu,  a  net  used  in  hunting — 
nyavu. 

Usiku,  night. 

Upuuzi,  nonsense,  silly  talk. 

Uapo,  an  oath — nyapo. 

Ubau,  a  plank — mbau. 

Wingi,  plenty. 

Upondo,  a  pole  for  punting — 
pondo. 

Ugali,  porridge. 

Umasikini,  poverty. 

Uwezo,  power,  ability. 

Ugomvi,  a  quarrel. 

Utulivu,  quietness. 

Wembe,  razor — nyembe. 

Ufufuo,  resurrection. 

Wali,  rice  [when  cooked}. 

Usubi,  sandfly. 

Utumwa,  service^  slavery,  some- 
thing which  has  to  be  done. 

Usharika,  sharing,  partnership, 

Usafi,  shavings  of  wood,  etc. 

Werevu,  shrewdness. 

Ugonjwa,  sickness,  diseast. 

Upande,  a  side — pande. 

Uimbo,  a  song — nyimbo. 

Wengo,  the  spleen. 

Uzi,  string,  thread — nyuzi. 

Ushi,  a  stringcourse — nyushi. 

Utepe,  a  stripe,  a  lint — tepe. 

Usultani,  sultanship. 

Upanga,  a  ,raw<£— panga. 

Ukwaju,  tamarinds. 


THE  U-  CLASS.  57 

Ukoga,  tartar  on  the  teeth.  Uthaifu,  weaknest. 

Wasio,  testament^  judgment.  Utajiri,  wealthiness. 

Uizi,  theft,  thievishness,  Weupe,  whiteness. 

Wakati,  time,  season.  Utambi,  wick  of  a  lamp — tambi. 

Ulimi,  the  tongue — ndimi.  Upepo,  wind — pepo. 

Uthia,  trouble,  noise,  confusion.  Uchawi,  witchcraft. 

Uwaziri,  viziership.  Ulimwengu,  the  world. 

Ukuta,  a  wall — kuta.  Ujana,  youth. 

Upotevu,  wastefulness. 

Adjectives  [U-  class]. — Adjectives,  including  the  vari- 
able numerals,  are  made  to  agree  with  substantives  of  the 
u  class,  when  in  the  singular  number,  by  prefixing  m-,  mu-t 
or  mw-,  as  if  agreeing  with  substantives  of  the  class  contain- 
ing mti,  a  tree.  See  pp.  3  and  16. 

Wembe  mkali,  a  sharp  razor.  Uimbo  mwema,  a  good  song. 

Adjectives  are  made  to  agree  with  substantives  of  the 
u  class,  when  in  the  plural  number,  by  prefixing  n-  or  ny-t 
as  if  agreeing  with  substantives  of  the  n  class.  See  p.  51. 

Funguo  nzito,  heavy  keys.  Nyimbo  njema,  good  songs. 

Nyembe  kali,  sharp  razors, 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

A  great  [much]  age.  A  long  beard.  A  long  hair  of  the  beard. 
Much  beauty.  A  long  bow.  Long  bows.  Small  brooms.  Short 
claws.  A  long  nail.  A  wide  courtyard.  Much  dew.  A  fine  face. 
Fine  faces.  A  little  piece  of  firewood.  Dry  firewood.  White  flour. 
Soft  flour.  Many  footprints.  Red  hair.  A  white  hair.  A  thick  hair. 
Black  ink.  Small  keys.  A  thick  lamp  wick.  Thick  planks.  A  light 
plank.  Heavy  punting  poles.  Two  red  planks.  I  want  two  long 
punting  poles.  I  have  bought  five  good  planks.  I  heard  three  songs. 
I  saw  much  Sour.  I  remained  one  night. 

Pronouns  [U-  «lass].  —  The  pronominal  syllables 
answering  to  the  u  class,  are  u  in  the  singular  and  gi  iu 
the  plural  Thus — 

Upole  u  mwema,  gentleness  is  good. 
Kuni  zi  fupi,  the  firewood  pieces  are  short. 
Urithi  umepotea,  the  inheritance  is  lost. 
Panga  zimepotea,  the  swords  are  lost. 
Nimeupata  ufalme,  I  have  got  the  kingdom. 
Nimezitwaa  funguo,  I  have  taken  the  keys. 


58  SWAHILI  EXERCISES. 

It  will  be  observed  that  in  the  Pronouns  as  in  Adjectives, 
the  singular  forms  are  the  same  as  those  appropriate  to 
Substantives  like  mti,  a  tree,  and  in  the  plural  they  are  the 
same  as  those  appropriate  to  plural  Substantives  of  the  « 
class.  Thus — 

Of  is  represented  by  wa  and  za. 

The  Possessive  Pronouns  are  formed  by  w-  and  z-. 

The  Demonstratives  are  huu  and  hizi. 

The  Interrogative  which?  becomes  upil  and  zipil 

Wembe  wa  Abdallah,  AbdallaVs  Funguo  hizi,  these  keys. 

razor.  Usiku  upi,  which  night  ? 

Nyembe  za  AH,  Alfs  razors  Fagio  zipi,  which  brooms  t 

Urefu  wake,  its  length.  Unga  wote,  all  flour. 

Mbau  zake,  its  planks.  Nyapo  zote,  all  oaths. 
Wali  huu,  this  {cooked}  rice. 

The  relatives  referring  to  nouns  of  the  u  class  are  wo,  or 

0  in  the  singular,  and  zo  in  the  plural. 

Ufunguo  uliopotea,  the  key  which  is  lost. 
Funguo  zilizopotea,  the  keys  which  are  lost, 
Utambi  nilioukata,  the  wick  I  cut. 
Tambi  nilizozikata,  the  ivicks  I  cut. 
Ubishi  wo  wote,  any  joke  whatever. 

The  negative  prefixes  used  before  a  verb  are  hau-  in  the 
singular,  and  hazi-  in  the  plural. 

Ubau  hautoshi,  the  plank  is  not  enough. 
Mbau  hazitoshi,  the  planks  are  not  enough. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

The  bow  is  broken.     The  sting  hurts.     The  kingdom  is  prospering. 

1  spilt  the  ink.     The  lightning  struck  a  tree,  and  killed  three  men. 
The  leaf  of  the  book  was  brought,  and  it  was  torn.     A  plank  was  not 
wanted  of  great  [much]  length.     The  boy  cut  [some]  firewood  and  hurt 
his  face.      They  found  the  wicks  and  they  were   very  short.     The 
kingdom  was  conquered.    The  footprints  are  not  visible.     The  fierce- 
ness of  the  chief  annoys  his  people.     The  child  took  the  keys  and 
rubbed  them.     The  joke  pleased  them.     A  handful  of  flour  will  suffice. 
The  world  is  evil.     This  inheritance  is  not  large.     I  held  your  sword. 
He  picked  up  my  razor,  and  brought  it.     The  court  yard  was  swept. 
The  broom  was  lost.    The  hunting  nets  were  broken,  and  the  animals 
escaped.    The  idleness  of  the  boy  surprises  me.     This  razor  is  sharp, 
This  plank  is  short    This  great  kingdom.    These  songs.    That  cooked 


THE  -NI   CASE.  59 

grain.  Those  brooms.  Which  bows?  Yonder  wide  court  yard. 
Those  keys  were  lost.  They  have  broken  all  those  punting  poles. 
That  beautiful  face.  This  bad  flour.  This  footprint.  That  sharp 
sword. 

The  nonsense  which  you  are  talking.  Those  swords  which  I  bought. 
He  bought  those  forks  which  I  refused.  The  walls  which  I  built  fell. 
All  night  the  people  danced  and  made  a  great  [much]  noise.  I  have 
picked  up  the  keys  which  the  child  rubbed.  He  begged  a  handful  of 
dates,  and  I  refused.  I  did  not  like  his  meanness  when  they  wanted 
him  to  give  [toa]  (some)  cooked  grain,  which  he  had  cooked.  They 
would  not  have  brought  the  flower  which  I  wanted. 

The  -Ni  Case. — All  Substantives  in  Swahili  (except  the 
names  of  persons  and  animals)  may  be  put  into  what  may 
be  called  the  locative  case  by  suffixing  -at.  The  accent  of 
the  word  is  shifted  by  the  suffix. 

Nyumba  becomes  nyumbani.  Mkunazi  becomes  mkunazfni. 

The  locative  case  expresses  merely  some  relation  of  a 
local  character,  and  may  be  translated  by  in,  to,  at,  from, 
out  of,  into,  before,  by,  or  any  other  preposition  in  English 
expressing  position.  It  has  very  nearly  the  same  effect  as 
the  preposition  katika. 

It  is  rarely  or  never  used  with  a  noun  followed  by  an 
adjective. 

When  the  substantive  is  followed  by  a  pronoun,  the  pro- 
noun may  take  one  of  three  prefixes,  mw-,  #a-,  kw-,  and 
no  other. 

Mw-  is  used  where  the  idea  intended  is  that  of  locality 
within. 

Nyumbani  mwangu,  into  or  within  my  house. 

Pa-  is  used  where  the  idea  of  nearness  is  intended 
Nyumbani  pangu,  at,  by,  near,  or  before  my  house. 

Kw-  is  used  where  motion  is  the  principal  idea,  and  in 
cases  of  distant  objects,  or  where  the  idea  is  of  an  indefinite 
character.  It  is  the  most  usual  of  the  three  prefixes. 

Nyumbani  kwangu,  to  my  house. 

Kwangu,  kwako,  etc.,  are  used  by  themselves  to  express 


60  SWAHILI  EXERCISES. 

at  home,  with  me,  you,  etc.,  in  my  country,  to  my  mind,  and 
so  forth. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

The  man  went  into  the  stream  [river].  And  they  followed  into  his 
house.  They  saw  many  trees  in  the  garden.  He  pushed  me  until  we 
arrived  at  our  house.  You  know  the  date  tree  before  my  door.  He 
slept  with  his  book  under  his  arm  [in  the  arm-pit].  I  have  not  yet 
returned  to  my  town.  I  will  wait  under  the  tree  in  the  road.  He  got 
out  of  the  well  and  arrived  [at]  the  town.  He  held  his  bow  and  his 
arrows  in  his  hand.  And  they  ran  away,  and  hid  themselves  in  their 
house.  When  they  arrived  at  the  river,  the  people  in  the  road  laughed, 
and  the  donkey  feared,  kicked,  and  fell  into  the  river  and  sank,  and 
the  man  and  the  youth  returned  to  their  house. 


INDECLINABLE  ADJECTIVES. 

The  jxaucity  of  regular  Adjectives  is  supplied  in  part  by 
the  use  of  words,  borrowed  chiefly  from  the  Arabic,  which 
have  no  prefixes,  and  therefore  cannot  vary  according  to  the 
forms  of  their  substantives.  Such  are — 

Bora,    best,    superior,    preferable,  Hafifu,  light,  insignificant. 

great.  Utupu,  naked. 

Yakini,  certain.  Halali,  lawful. 

Rahisi,  cheap,  easy.  Farathi,  obligatory,  unavoidable. 

Safi,  clean,  pure.  Kanuni,  indispensable,  a  necessary 
Hodari,  clever,  able,  strong.  condition. 

Kamili,  complete,  perfect,  even  (not  Sunne,  advisable,  recommended. 

odd).  Lazimu,  binding  upon,  compulsory 

Rathi,  content.  Haramu,  forbidden,  unlawful. 

Sahihi,  correct,  free  from  error.  Thahiri,  manifest,  evident,  clear. 

Fasihi,   correct,  free  from   impro-  Kadiri,  moderate,  middling. 

priety.  Tele,  plenty,  a  good  deal  of. 

Ghali,  dear,  expensive.  Marithawa,  plenty,  abundant. 

Yabis,  dry,  tolid.  Masikini,  poor. 

Killa,  every.  Tayari,  ready. 

Amini,  faithful,  trustworthy.  Salama,  safe,  not  hurt. 

Haba,/rtw,  too  little.  Laini,  smooth,  soft,  gentle. 

Imara,  firm.  Thaifu,   weak,   inferior,  good  for 
fw,  not  enslaved.  nothing. 

Killa  stands  alone  in  always  preceding  its  substantives. 
Killa  siku,  every  day 


COMPOUND  ADJECTIVES.  6 1 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

You  are  good  for  nothing.  His  house  is  clean.  Those  eggs  are 
cheap.  His  slaves  are  faithful.  Every  man  carried  a  sword.  The 
books  are  dear.  The  wood  which  you  bought  is  smooth.  These 
children  are  content  with  their  good  food.  Those  men  are  not 
slaves,  they  are  free.  The  boxes  which  they  are  making  are  ready. 
Their  punting  poles  are  complete.  Your  misfortunes  are  light.  My 
work  is  inferior.  Your  work  is  superior.  They  sent  too  little  lime. 
The  church  which  they  are  building  is  firm.  It  is  not  lawful  to  kill. 
That  strong  man  who  is  fighting  will  conquer  the  weak  man.  The 
bananas  in  their  garden  are  abundant.  The  food  which  they  are 
refusing  is  dry.  All  those  people  are  poor.  I  found  him  naked. 

COMPOUND  ADJECTIVES. 

Substantives  and  verbs  may  be  converted  into  adjectives 
by  prefixing  the  variable  particle  -a. 

Mtu  wa  akili,  a  sensible  man,  a  man  of  sense. 
Nyumba  ya  kupendeza,  a  pleasing  house, 
Mbau  za  kutosha,  flanks  enough. 

Adjectives  of  this  kind  may  be  made  as  they  are  wanted. 
The  following  are  a  few  of  the  most  useful : — 

Ancient,  -a  kale.  Left  hand,  -a  kushoto. 

Civilized,  -a  kiungwana.  The  other,  -a  pili. 

Cold,  -a  baridi.  Other  people 's,  -a  watu. 

Crafty,  -a  hila.  Regular,  -a  kaida. 

Dark  (not  light),  -a  giza.  Right  hand,  -a  kulia,  -a  kuumc. 

Eternal,  -a  milele.  Round,  -a  mviringo. 

European,  -a  kizungu.  Secret,   a  siri. 

First,  former,  -a  kwanza.  Some  one  else's,  -a  mwenyewe. 

fortunate,  -a  bahati,  -a  heri.  True,  -a  kweli. 

Hot  (of  things),  -a  moto.  Uncivilized,  -a  kishenzi. 

Human,  -a  mwana  Adamu.  Valuable,  -a  thamani. 

Just,  -a  haki.  Wild,  -a  mwituni. 

The  ordinal  numbers  are  formed  on  the  same  system. 

First,  -a  kwanza  or  -a  mosL  Ninth,  -a  tisa,  -a  tissia,  -» 
Second,  -a  pili.  kenda. 

Third,  -a  tatu.  Tenth,  -a  kumi. 

Fourth,  -a  "nne.  Eleventh,  -a  edashara. 

Fifth,  -a  tatu.  Twelfth,  -a  thenashara. 

Sixth,  -a  sita.  Twentieth,  -a  asharini. 

Seventh,  -a  saba.  Hundredth,  -a  mia. 

Eighth,  -a  nane.  Last,  -a  mwisho. 


62  SWAHIU   EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

These  books  [are]  ancient.  He  does  not  know  civilized  customs. 
After  the  time  of  the  rains  the  cold  winds  begin  [anza].  Crafty  people 
are  often  deceived.  Little  work  is  done  [in  the]  dark  days.  Very  bad 
circumstances  [are]  not  eternal.  European  cloth  [is]  dear.  They  burnt 
down  the  first  town  which  they  conquered.  The  fortunate  man  has 
bought  a  pleasing  house.  He  spilt  the  hot  coffee.  A  just  man  is 
loved  by  his  slave.  Our  custom  [is]  to  pass  on  the  left  side  of  the  road. 
The  sensible  man  refused  to  remain  in  the  other  house.  They  cooked 
his  porridge  in  somebody  else's  cooking  pot.  Don't  put  on  other 
people's  clothes.  The  right  hand  wall  of  the  house  fell.  He  himself 
built  a  round  hut.  The  Sultan  [Sultani]  is  considering  the  secret  affairs 
of  bis  kingdom.  The  uncivilized  chief  destroyed  the  valuable  book. 
Call  the  second  man.  Cut  down  every  fourth  tree.  The  ninth  house 
fell  down.  I  will  pay  you  every  tenth  day. 


ADJECTIVAL  VERBS. 

A  large  part  of  the  work  of  English  adjectives  is  done  in 
Swahili  by  verbs,  which  denote  the  possessing,  or  rather 
acquiring,  the  quality.  The  -me-  tense  as  a  rule  denotes  the 
present  possessing  of  the  quality,  and  therefore  answers  to 
the  English  present  with  is  or  are.  The  relative  past  tense 
with  -It-  forms  a  quasi  adjective,  and  the  negative  relative  a 
corresponding  privative  adjective. 

Mtungi  unajaa,  the  water-jar  is  getting  full, 
Mtungi  umejaa,  the  -water-jar  is  full. 
Mtungi  uliojaa,  the  full  -water-jar. 
Mtungi  usiojaa,  t/te  not  full  water-jar. 
Kitu  kilichopotea,  the  lost  thing. 
Kitu  kisichopotea,  the  thing  not  lost. 
Neno  lililopendeza,  the  pleasing  word. 
Neno  lisilopcndeza,  the  unf  leasing  -word. 

To  btconu  audible,  kusikiliana.  To  become  carved,  kunakishiwa. 

„        blind,  kupofuka.  „  cheap,  kurahisika. 

,,         -well  boiled,  kutokoseka,  „  clean,  kutakata,  kutaka- 
„        broken,  kuvunjika.  sika. 

„        bright  (by  rubbing),  ku-  „  clear  (of  the  sky),  kuU- 

katuka.  kata. 

„  „      (shining),  kung-  „          ,,     (manifest),  kuelea. 

'ara.  ,,  comforted,  kufarajika. 

„        bruised,  kuchubuka.  „  comfortabh '.kutengenea. 

,,        catlout,  kufaganzi.  complete,  kutimia. 


ADJECTIVAL  VERBS. 


To  become  confident,  kutumaini. 
„        confused,  kufathaika. 
M        crooked,  kupotoka. 
„        in    disorder,    kuchafu- 

ka. 

„        dry,  kukauka. 
,,        enough,  kutosha. 
„       fat,  kunona. 
,,       fatigued,  kuchoka. 
,,        flexible,  kupindana. 
„        flourishing,  kusitawt. 
„       foolish,  kupumbazika. 
,,       full,  kujaa. 
„          „     (with  eating}*  ku- 

shiba. 

M       fatt  grown,  kukomaa, 
kupevuka. 

heavy  to,  kulemea. 

humble,  kunenyekea. 

intoxicated,  kulewa. 

lean,  kukonda. 

less,  kupunguka. 

loose,  kulegea. 

mouldy,  kufanya  ukun- 

Su- 

0        more,  kuzidi. 
,,        obligatory  upon,   kula- 

zimu. 

„        cpen,  kufunuka. 
M        opposite,  kuelekea. 
„        paralytic,  kupooza. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

The  man's  voice  is  audible.  The  children  became  blind.  The  well- 
boiled  eggs.  The  broken  water-jars.  The  children's  keys  are  bright. 
The  moon  is  brilliant  The  child's  leg  is  bruised.  The  knee  is  callous. 
The  door  is  carved.  The  food  became  cheap.  The  spoons  will  not  be 
clean.  The  heavens  are  clear.  Your  words  are  clear.  Your  soul  is 
comforted.  You  are  extremely  [sana]  comfortable.  The  bow  is  flexible. 
He  is  confident.  You  are  confused.  The  rope  is  crooked.  The  child  is 
well.  The  room  is  in  disorder.  The  road  is  dry.  The  food  is  enough. 
The  slaves  were  fatigued.  Our  work  is  flourishing.  The  overseer  was 
sober.  The  trees  are  stunted.  The  thread  is  tangled.  His  waistcoat 
is  tight.  Abdallah  is  uncomfortable.  The  bag  is  unsewn.  He  is 
useful.  The  agreement  is  void.  The  youth  is  weak.  Majaliwa  is 
weary  with  work.  The  old  man  is  wrinkled.  A  wrinkled  face.  The 
pearl  is  useful  to  me.  A  stunted  tree.  I  am  not  at  all  sorry.  A  silent 


To  become  patient,  kuyumilia,  ku- 
stahimili. 

perfect,  kukamilika. 

pleasing,  kupendeza. 

precipitous,  kuchongo- 
ka. 

putrid,  kuoza. 

quiet,  kutulia. 

rough,  kuparuza. 

round,  kuviringa. 

scorched,  or  scalded,  ku 
ungua. 

sick,  kuugua. 

silent,  kunyamaza. 

sober,  kulevuka. 

sorry,  kusikitika. 

spherical,  kuviringana. 

stunted,  kuvia. 

tangled,  kutatana. 

tight,  kukazana. 

torn,  kupasuka. 

uncomfortable  (of  per- 
sons), kusumbuka. 

unsewn,  kufumuka. 

useful  to,  kufaa. 

visible,  kuonekana. 

void,  kutanguka. 

weak,  kuthoofika. 

•weary,  kuchoka. 

ivcll,  kupona. 

wrinkled,  kukunjana. 


64  SWAHILI  EXERCISES. 

slave  girl.  A  scalded  child  dreads  the  fire.  The  world  is  spherical. 
A  round  box.  A  rough  road.  A  quiet  youth.  Putrid  meat.  A  pre- 
cipitous rock.  The  pleasing  overseer.  The  number  is  perfect.  A 
paralytic  old  man.  The  dhow  is  opposite  to  our  home.  The  flower 
is  open.  My  hunger  has  become  more.  The  mouldy  loaf.  My 
hunger  has  become  less.  The  intoxicated  slaves.  Humble  Europeans. 
The  load  has  become  heavy  to  the  porter.  The  bananas  are  full 
grown.  The  foreigner  is  becoming  foolish. 


RELATIVE  WITHOUT   NOTE  OF  TIME. 

The  relative  may  be  connected  with  a  verb  without  any 
tense  prefix,  which  then  has  something  of  the  nature  of  an 
adjective,  or  adjectival  substantive. 

The  sign  of  the  person  must  precede,  and  the  sign  of  the 
relative  follow  the  verb.  An  objective  prefix  may  be 
inserted  between  the  personal  prefex  and  the  verb. 

Umpendaye,  whom  you  love=your  beloved^  or  [you]  who  love  him— you 

his  lover. 

Niwezaye,  [/]  who  can. 
Warukao,  they  which  fly <— flying things. 
Asikiaye,  he  who  hears  =•  a  hearer. 
Mpitayo,  you  who  pass=ye  passers  by. 
Kiviringacho,  which  is  rounded^  round. 

Translate  into  Swahili — • 

The  person  you  love  has  come  back.  The  chief  you  fear  has  got 
well.  The  fire  which  burns  in  my  house  will  cook  the  meat  you  bring. 
You  will  get  all  the  food  I  cook  in  your  cooking  pot.  The  books  you 
read  will  not  be  of  use  to  you.  You  will  find  the  profit  you  look  for. 
The  door  I  open  I  shall  not  shut. 


NAMES   OF  ANIMALS. 

Names  of  animals  and  living  things  generally  are  con- 
structed with  adjectives  and  pronouns  proper  to  the  first  class. 

Mtu  mzuri,  a  fitte  man.  Watu  wazuri,  fine  people. 

Ng'ombe  mzuri,  afitie  ox.  Ng'ombe  wazuri,  fine  oxen. 

Kiboko  mzuri,  a  fine  hippopota-  Viboko  wazuri,  fine  hippopotamus. 

mus.  Masultani  wazuri,  fint  sultans, 
SulUni  mzuri,  a  fine  sultan. 


NAMES   OF   ANIMALS.  65 

Titles  of  office,  being  foreign  words,  are  made  plural  by 
prefixing  ma-. 

Waziri,  a  vizier,  Mawaziri,  viziers. 

.   List  of  names  of  persons,  animals,  etc.     The  plural  is 
added  in  each  case. 

I  labeshia,  Abyssinian,  mahabeshia. 
Wakili,  agent,  mawakili. 
Nyama,  animal,  nyama. 
Siafu,  biting  ants,  siafu. 
Chungu,  ants,  chungu. 
Mchwa,  white  ants,  mchwa. 
Nyani,  ape,  nyani. 
Punda,  ass,  donkey,  punda, 
Shangazi,  aunt,  mashangazi. 
Kinyozi,  barber,  vinyozi. 
Nyuki,  bee,  nyuki. 
Ndege,  bird,  ndege. 
Kipofu,  a  blind  person,  vipofu. 
Kijana,  boy  or  girl,  vijana. 
Ndugu,  brother  or  sister,  ndugu. 
Nyati,  buffalo,  nyati. 
Fahali,  bull,  mafahali. 
Ngamia,  camel,  ngamia. 
Sermala,  carpenter,  masermala. 
Paka,  cat,  paka. 

Ng'ombe,  cattle,  cow,  ox,  ng'ombe. 
Taandu,  centipede,  taandu. 
Jumbe,  chief,  majumbe. 
Jogoo,  cock,  majogoo. 
Mende,  cockroach,  mende. 
Jemadari,    commander ;    majema- 

dari. 

Suria,  concubine,  masuria. 
Mamba,  crocodile,  mamba. 
Kiziwi,  a  deaf  person,  vizivri. 
Mbwa,  dog,  mbwa. 
Bata,  duck,  mabata. 
Kibeti,  dwarf,  vibeti. 
Tembo,  elephant,  tembo. 
Adui,  enemy,  maadui,  or  adui. 
Baba,  father,  baba. 
Samaki,_/z.r/i,  samaki. 
Kirpboto,_/ftra,  viroboto. 
lw.\,fiyt  mainzi. 


_/,  hen,  kuku. 
Rafiki,  friend,  marafiki. 
Chora.,  frog;  vyura. 
Paa,  gazelle,  paa. 
Kijakazi,  slave  girl,  vijakazi. 
Mbuzi,  goat,  mbuzi. 
Liwali,  governor,  maliwali. 
Bibi,  grandmother,  mistress,  bibi. 
Mwewe,  hawk,  mwewe. 
Kiboko,  hippopotamus,  viboko. 
Frasi,  horse,  frasi. 
Banyani,  heathen  Indian,  Mabau- 

yani. 

Jini,  a  fin,  a  spirit,  majini. 
Kathi,  judge,  makathi. 
Bibi,  lady,  mistress,  bibi 
Chui,  leopard,  chui. 
Simba,  lion,  simba. 
Bwana,  master,  bwana. 
Kima,  monkey •,  kima. 
Mama,  mother^  mama. 
Nguruwe,  pig,  nguruwe. 
Njiwa,  pigeon,  njiwa. 
Kasisi,  Christian  priest,  maka.  i^L 
Sungura,  rabbit,  sungura. 
Panya,  rat,  panya, 
Kifaru,  rhinoceros,  vifara. 
P.aharia,  sailor,  baharia. 
Nge,  scorpion,  nge. 
Papa,  shark,  papa. 
Kondoo,  sheep,  kondoo, 
Nyoka,  snake,  nyoka. 
Asikari,  soldier,  asikar 
Kobe,  tortoise,  kobe. 
Kasa,  turtle,  kasa. 
Hua,  turtle  dove,  hua. 
Dobi,  washerman,  dobi. 
Panda  milia.  zebra*  punda  milia. 


66  SWAHILI  EXERCISES, 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

I  told  the  soldiers,  and  they  called  the  commander.  The  tall 
Abyssinian  told  the  fierce  agent.  The  great  elephant  was  bitten  by 
ants.  The  white  ants  [are]  our  enemies.  The  large  apes  [are]  in  the 
trees.  The  barber's  white  donkey  kicked  my  aunt.  The  bees  make 
honey.  The  boys  saw  a  camel,  their  sister  saw  two  fine  birds.  The 
carpenter  was  stung  by  a  centipede.  I  saw  the  chief;  he  bought  many 
cattle,  and  many  cocks  and  hens,  and  large  ducks.  I  saw  a  dog ;  he 
was  bitten  by  the  flies.  My  friends  do  not  like  the  cockroaches.  The 
slave  girl  has  bought  a  beautiful  gazelle.  My  father  bought  much  fruit 
[pi.];  a  dwarf  his  enemy  took  it.  The  lady  was  afraid  of  the  large 
frogs  ;  the  master  said,  The  great  lion  and  the  fierce  leopard  are  feared, 
but  people  of  understanding  do  not  fear  a  frog.  The  jin  bewitched 
[made  witchcraft  against]  the  governor  ;  his  mother  wanted  to  kill  a 
large  pig  and  three  pigeons ;  the  Christian  priest  told  her  this  (haya) 
[was]  nonsense.  When  the  sailor  was  bathing  I  saw  a  shark  come  [it 
came]  and  seize  [and  it  seized]  him  with  its  teeth.  I  bought  eight  fat 
sheep.  The  cunning  snake  suddenly  took  the  rabbit.  The  washerman 
bought  a  donkey,  but  the  soldiers  got  it ;  and  [hatta]  as  they  were 
taking  it  away  [chukua]  a  scorpion  stung  it  [on]  the  foot  The  good 
judge  passed  [by]  and  saw  the  soldiers  ;  he  ordered  them  to  be  beaten 
by  the  sailors  of  our  Sultan's  vessel. 

Short  blind  men.  A  foreign  deaf  man.  A  large  flea.  Female 
hippopotamus.  A  whole  rhinoceros.  A  beautiful  slave  girl.  Beauti- 
ful youths.  Eight  jealous  deaf  people.  Six  heavy  hippopotamus. 
Those  fleas.  These  slave  girls.  That  hippopotamus  is  fierce.  The 
blind  person  is  dead.  Who  is  this  blind  person?  Your  slave  girls 
took  my  umbrella.  The  oxen  are  fat.  The  donkeys  were  full.  The 
lean  ox. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

There  are  no  degrees  of  comparison  in  Swahili.  The 
effect  of  the  Superlative  in  English  is  generally  given  by 
the  simple  use  of  the  adjective,  as  if  in  an  absolute  sense. 

Huyu  mwema.     This  (man  is  the)  best. 
Yupi  mwema  ?     Which  (man  is  the)  best  ? 

Where  the  Superlative  is  joined  in  English  with  a  definite 
article,  or  a  possessive  pronoun,  the  Relative  is  employed  in 
Swahili. 

The  broadest  road,  Njia  iliyo  pana. 

My  sharpest  sword,  Upanga,  u'angu  ulif  mkall. 


TO   BE.  67 

If  it  is  necessary  to  employ  both  the  Positive  and  the 
Superlative,  the  latter  may  be  distinguished  by  adding  sana. 

Huyu  mwema,  lakini  aliye  mwema  sana  ni  huyu.     Thit  man  is  good, 
but  the  best  man  (the  man  who  is  very  good)  is  this. 

The  Comparative  is    expressed  by  the  use  of  kuliko 
=  where  there  is. 

Huyu  mwema  kuliko  yule.     This  man  is  good  where  that  man  it,  i.e., 

he  is  the  good  one  (the  better)  of  the  two. 
Saa  hii  njema  kuliko  ile,  This  watch  is  better  than  that. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

Melinda  [Malindi]  is  a  more  ancient  town  than  Mombas  [Mvita]. 
The  language  of  the  people  of  Mombas  is  more  correct  than  the  language 
of  Zanzibar  [Unguja].  Bad  people  are  worse  than  animals.  Date 
trees  are  more  beautiful  than  cocoa-nut  trees.  The  bitterest  medicine. 
This  woollen  cloth  is  blacker  than  this,  but  the  blackest  is  that  yonder. 
This  river  is  broader  than  the  Rovuma.  Js  that  place  cleaner  than 
this  ?  My  joy  is  more  complete  than  yours.  The  overlooker's  accounts 
are  more  correct  than  those  of  the  fisherman.  The  slaves  were  more 
cunning  than  the  overlooker,  and  they  deceived  him.  The  European 
•was  more  fierce  than  the  mason,  and  beat  all  the  slaves.  The  gun- 
powder in  the  barrel  is  drier  than  the  soap,  which  is  in  this  box. 
This  pole  is  firmer  than  that  which  was  put  into  the  pit  yesterday. 
This  water-jar  is  fuller  than  that.  Abdallah's  house  is  larger  than  mine, 
but  mine  is  more  beautiful  than  all  the  houses  which  I  have  seen.  This 
road  is  longer  than  that  to  your  house,  but  the  shortest  passes  by  your 
plantation.  Which  wood  ts  hardest  ?  The  chief  is  weaker  than  the 
thieves.  A  piece  of  firewood  is  lighter  than  a  thick  plank.  These 
bananas  are  redder  and  more  sweet  than  yours.  Our  smallest  bell  is 
heavier  than  their  largest.  Abdallah  bin  All's  beard  is  long,  but  Sule- 
man's  is  the  longest  [that  of  Suleman  long  very]. 

TO  BE. 

In  Swahili  the  present  tense  of  the  verb  to  be  may  be 
rendered  in  eight  different  ways. 

1.  By  simple  omission. 

Nyumba  hii  kubwa,  this  house  is  large, 

2.  By  ni  for  all  persons  and  both  numbers. 

Bwana  wangu  ni  Sultani,  my  master  it  the  S 


58  SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 

3.  By  the  sign  of  the  person. 

Tu  tayari,  we  an  ready. 

4,  5,  and  6.  By  the  sign  of  the  person  followed  by  the 
syllables  -ko,  -mo,  and  -po. 

Bwana  yumo  nyumbani,  master  is  inside  the  house. 

Bithaa  nyingi  ziko  kwangu,  much  merchandise  is  at  my  house, 

Yupo  hapa  msimamizi,  the  overlooker  is  here. 

7.  By  the  sign  of  the  infinitive  followed  by  -na. 

Kuna  mtu,  there  is  a  man. 

8.  By  the  syllable  -//-  inserted  between  the  sign  of  the 
person  and  a  relative  particle. 

Aliye,  (he)  who  is.  Zilizo,  (those)  which  are. 

Of  these  the  three  most  important  are  :  i.  By  omission, 
which  is  customary  wherever  the  verb  to  be  is  used  as 
a  mere  connective.  5.  By  the  personal  sign  followed  by 
-kot  which  must  be  used  when  being  in  a  place  is  intended, 
and  is  the  usual  form  where  the  verb  to  be  stands  alone,  or 
without  any  substantive  or  adjective  immediately  following 
it.  8.  By  -//-  with  a  relative.  The  other  uses  will  be  found 
explained  in  the  grammar,  but  they  will  be  little  wanted  by 
a  beginner. 

It  is  unnecessary  to  give  any  further  exercises  on  the 
first  rule. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

The  book  is  on  the  table.  The  cook  is  near.  The  planks  are  in  the 
ship.  The  fishermen  are  by  the  canoe.  The  canoes  are  on  the  water. 
The  carts  are  on  the  road.  The  oranges  are  in  the  basket.  Are  there 
many  slaves  in  your  town?  There  are  [they  are].  I  saw  six  ships  yes- 
terday, where  are  they  now  ?  They  are  by  the  island.  Are  there  [are 
they]  canoes  near  them  ?  There  are  seven  canoes  very  near.  Where 
is  our  overlooker?  He  is  at  the  plantation.  Are  there  slaves  with 
him?  .  There  are  twenty.  Who  is  there?  Abdallah  is  there. 
Where  is  Ali  ?  He  is  at  the  house.  The  chief  is  outside. 

I  who  am  good.  You  who  are  bad.  He  who  is  weak.  She  who  is 
idle.  We  who  are  gentle.  You  [pi.]  who  are  fierce.  A  stone  which 
is  large.  A  house  which  is  small.  Dates  which  are  sweet.  A  man 
who  is  an  old  man.  A  chief  who  is  a  drunkard.  A  piece  which  is 
little.  A  chest  which  is  heavy.  Arrows  which  are  sharp.  Goods 
[merchandise]  which  are  dear. 


TO   BE,  69 

Where  locality  is  part  of  the  idea,  the  particle  ~ko  is 
added  after  the  relative. 

Watu  walioko  chini,  the  people  who  are  below. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

The  book  which  is  on  the  table.  The  planks  which  are  in  the  ship. 
The  fishermen  who  are  by  the  canoe.  The  canoes  which  are  on  the 
water.  The  oranges  which  are  on  the  trees.  The  slaves  which  are  in 
our  town  will  all  run  away,  when  they  see  the  gun  which  is  in  your 
hand.  The  ships  which  are  by  the  island  will  destroy  the  town  which 
is  [on]  this  side  of  the  river.  The  chief  who  is  in  our  town.  The  trees 
which  are  by  the  road. 

The  past  tense  'was,  were,  had  been,  is  expressed  by 
-likuwa,  or  -alikuwa,  with  the  proper  prefix.  It  is  followed 
by  -ko  when  being  in  a  place  is  part  of  the  idea  intended. 

Nalikuwa,  /  was,  Twalikuwa,  we  were. 

Walikuwa,  you  were,  thou  wast.  Mwalikuwa,  you  were. 

Alikuwa,  he  or  she  was.  Walikuwa,   Yalikuwa,    Zalikuwa, 
Walikuwa,  Yalikuwa,  Chalikuwa,         Vyalikuwa,  they  were. 

Lalikuwa,  Palikuwa,  it  was.  Aliku wako,  he  was  (there) 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

Abdallah  was  chief;  I  was  a  slave.  You  were  a  good  man.  He  wa» 
a  fisherman.  They  were  idle  slaves.  The  Europeans  were  fierce 
people.  Those  people  were  all  black.  The  owner  was  a  man  of  sense, 
the  others  were  simpletons. 

The  black  men  were  in  the  forest.  The  European  was  by  the 
cannon.  The  gun  was  in  the  house.  The  house  was  by  the  river ; 
the  river  was  near  the  mountain.  The  mountain  was  in  the  island. 
The  island  was  in  the  sea.  Many  people  were  in  the  town,  but  few 
people  were  outside  the  houses. 

The  relative  particles  are  used  in  the  ordinary  way  with 
this  past  tense,  and  the  particle  ko  is  added  when  required. 

Niliyekuwa(ko),  (I)  who  was. 

Uliyekuwa(ko),  (you)  who  were. 

Aliyekuwa(ko),  (He  or  she)  who  was. 

Uliokuwa(ko),;Iliyokuwa(ko),  Kilichokuwa(ko),  Lililokuwa(ko),  Pali- 

pokuwa(ko),  (it)  which  was. 
Tuliokuwa(ko),  (we)  who  were. 
Mliokuwa(ko),  (you)  who  were. 
Waliokuwa(ko),  (they)  who  were. 
Iliyokuwa(ko),    Zilizokuwa(ko),   Vilivyokuwa(ko),   Yaliyokuwafko), 

(they)  which  were. 


70  SWAH1LI   EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

The  chief  was  in  the  house ;  his  people  were  there  far  off.  The 
European  was  on  the  top  of  the  rock.  The  canoe  was  near.  I  saw 
two  men  who  were  at  the  door  of  the  house  near  the  date  tree.  The 
chief  said  you  were  an  old  man  long  ago,  and  I  said  to  him,  Were  you 
a  child  ?  And  he  said  to  me,  I  was  a  youth.  The  ships  were  on  the 
sea,  the  men  were  in  the  town.  The  slaves  were  the  European's 
servants.  I  was  in  the  town,  and  I  saw  the  ancient  houses  which  were 
there.  I  saw  many  people,  they  were  on  the  road,  but  those  whom 
our  companions  saw  were  in  the  wood,  and  they  -were  few.  Many 
people  were  with  the  chief.  A  few  ran  away ;  those  who  ran  away  were 
afterwards  in  our  town,  and  I  killed  them  all.  Five  large  chests  were 
in  my  house  many  days. 

The  men  who  were  in  the  town  were  afraid  ;  we  who  were  outside  ran 
away.  The  chief  called  the  fishermen,  who  were  by  the  canoe.  Did 
you  see  the  people  who  were  there  ?  How  many  canoes  which  were 
there  have  sunk?  The  European  cut  down  all  the  trees  which  were 
on  the  plantation.  The  chief  killed  all  who  were  our  slaves.  The 
chests  which  were  at  my  house  were  broken  by  the  thieves  who  were 
afterwards  in  your  town.  The  houses  which  were  there  have  all  fallen 
down.  I  bought  all  the  books  which  were  there.  He  brought  the 
book  which  was  on  my  table. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

The  only  really  irregular  form  in  Swahili  is  the  Imperative 
of  the  verb  kuja  —  to  come,  which  makes  njoo  and  njooni  = 
come,  and  come  ye.  Monosyllabic  verbs,  however,  and  dis- 
syllabic verbs  beginning  with  a  vowel,  keep  the  ku-  of  the 
infinitive  in  many  of  their  tenses,  and  thus  are  apparently 
irregular.  The  following  table  of  the  tenses  of  the  verb  to 
come  will  show  the  cases  in  which  the  ku-  is  retained. 

Najat  I  come.  Nimekuja,  I  have  come. 

Ntkaja,  and  I  came.  Nalikuja,  I  came. 

Nikijat  I  coming.  Nitakuja,  I  shall  come. 

Sij'i,  I  come  not.  Nijapokuja,  even  if  I  come. 

Sikuja,  I  did  not  come.  Ningekuja,  I  should  come. 

Sijaja,  I  am  not  yet  como  Ningalikuja,  I  should  have  come. 

Nisije,  let  me  not  come.  Nisijakuja,  before  I  come. 

Nije,  let  me  come.  Nisipokuja,  when  I  come  not. 

Nijaye,  I  who  come.  Niliyekujay  I  who  came. 
Ninakuja,  I  am  coming. 

This  irregularity  depends  upon  the  question  of  accent,  as 


IRREGULAR   VERBS.  71 

the  insertion  of  an  objective  prefix  makes  it  unnecessary. 
Thus— 

Arnekula,  he  has  eaten.  Amemla,  he  has  eaten  htm. 

Kupa-=\Q  give  to,  must  always  have  the  objective  prefix 
and  therefore  is  never  irregular. 

Nimempa,  I  have  given  him.  Atanipa,  he  will  give  me, 

List  of  Monosyllabic  Verbs  : — 

Kucha,  to  rise  (of  the  sun),  to  fear.  Kula,  to  eat. 

"  chwa  or  twa,  to  set  (of  the  sun),  "  nya,  to  fall  like  rain,  to  rain, 

to  be  feared.  "  nywa  or  nwa,  to  drink. 

"  fa,  to  die.  "  pa,  to  give  to. 

"  ja,  to  come.  "  wa,  to  be,  to  become. 

The  passives,  kuliwa,  to  be  eaten,  kunyewa,  to  be  drunk 
up,  kupewa,  to  receive,  are  regular. 

Dissyllable  Vowel  Verbs : — 

Kuanza,  to  begin.  Kuita,  to  call. 

"  enda,  to  go.  "  iva,  to  get  ripe. 

"  iba,  to  steal.  "  oga,  to  bathe  (pronounced  koga) 

"  imba,  to  sing.  "  oka,  to  bake. 

"  isha,  to  finish,  to  come  to  an  end.  "  uza,  to  sell  (pronounced  kuza). 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

The  five  thieves  stole  the  chests  which  were  at  my  house.  The 
merchandise  which  was  in  the  ship  was  stolen  by  the  fishermen.  The 
slave  women  began  to  sing.  They  sang  many  beautiful  songs. 
The  chief  went  to  bathe  in  the  river.  The  bananas  are  not  yet  ripe; 
they  are  full  grown,  but  they  are  not  sweet.  You  sold  four  slaves  your- 
self. We  will  bake  the  bread  [mikate],  which  you  will  want  on  the 
road.  Our  money  is  finished,  we  cannot  buy  your  pumpkins.  The 
mangoes  will  come  to  an  end  if  you  eat  them  now.  Who  [is  it  who] 
called  me?  Who  [is  it  who]  is  singing?  I  have  not  finished  yet. 
When  shall  you  come  to  an  end  ?  Do  not  steal  people.  Go  [pi.]  into 
the  town,  and  call  five  people  to  sing  songs  at  my  house.  Our  people 
have  eaten  all  the  bananas,  we  have  not  sold  even  one.  You  will  die. 
He  will  come  to  our  home.  We  shall  eat  meat.  The  meat  has  been 
eaten  which  he  received  from  me  [was  given  by  me].  Let  us  eat  and 
drink.  The  night  will  come  and  the  slaves  will  eat.  We  always  drink 
water  only.  The  sun  is  setting. 


SWA  II I  LI    EXERCISES. 


TO   HAVE. 

The  verb  to  haie  is  expressed  in  Swahili  by  kuwa  na  = 
to  be  with. 

Nina,  I  have.  Hawana,  Haina,  Hazina,  Havina 

Una,  thou  hast,  you  have.  Hayana,  they  have  not. 

Ana,  he  or  she  has.  Nalikuwa  na,  I  had. 
Una,    Ina,     Kina,     Lina,    Pana,     Walikuwa  na,  you  had. 

Kuna,  it  has.  Alikuwa  na,  he  or  she  had. 

Tuna,  we  have.  Walikuwa  na,  Yalikuwa  na,  Chali 

Mna,  ye  have,  you  have.  kuwa   na,    Lalikuwa   na,   Pali 

Wana,   Ina,    Zina,    Vina,  Yana,        kuwa  na,  Kulikuwa  na,  it  had. 

they  have.  Twalikuwa  na,  we  had. 

Sine,  I  have  not.  Mwalikuwa  na,  ye  had. 

Huna,  you  have  not.  Walikuwa  na,  Yalikuwa  na,  Zali- 

Hana,  he  or  she  has  not.  kuwa   na,  Vyalikuwa  na,  they 
Hauna,    Haina,    Hakina,  Halina,         had. 

Hapana,  Hakuna,  it  has  not.  Nitakuwa  na,  etc.,  /,  etc.,  shall 

Hatuna,  we  have  not.  have. 
Hamna,  ye  have  not. 

The  other  tenses  are  formed  in  the  same  manner.  Where 
an  objective  prefix  would  be  used  with  an  ordinary  verb,  the 
relative  particle  is  added  to  the  final  na  (p.  23). 

Ninalo,  I  have  it  (kasha). 
Ninazo,  I  have- them  (nyumba). 
Nalikuwa  nazo  nyumba  hizi,  /  had  these  houses. 

Sikuwa  na  kisu,  kama  ningalikuwa  nacho  ningal imua,  /  had  no  knife  ; 
if  I  had  had  one,  I  should  have  killed  him. 

When  joined  with  a  relative,  the  relative  particle  attaches 
itself  to  the  verb  kuwa,  and  so  occurs  twice. 

Kasha  nililo  nalo,  the  chest  I  have,  i.e.,  which  I  am  with  it. 
Kitu  cho  chote  alicho  nacho,  anything  whatever  which  he  has. 
Fetha  nilizokuwa  nazo,  the  money  I  had. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

I  wanted  to  buy  all  the  cocoa-nuts  which  the  chief  had,  but  I  find  he 
had  many  which  I  did  not  get.  I  have  a  sword,  and  [you]  you  have  a 
spear  and  a  shield  ;  what  are  we  to  fear  ?  If  a  man  has  money  he  will 
be  great.  If  a  man  has  not  money  he  will  not  be  great.  My  house  is 
large,  it  has  not  a  door.  I  had  not  a  house  formerly,  now  I  have  these 
three.  The  thieves  stole  everything  which  we  had.  The  old  man  has 
many  valuable  books.  I  shall  buy  all  the  books  the  Europeans  have. 


COMPOUND   TENSES.  73 

I  sold  all  the  books  I  had  myself,  except  those  which  you  gave  me.  I 
have  them  now  at  [my]  house.  If  Abdallah  dies,  I  shall  have  much 
money.  I  shall  have  the  property  which  you  will  give  me.  If  you  give 
me  nothing  [if  you  give  me  not  anything],  I  shall  have  nothing.  He 
tried  to  kill  me  and  I  struck  him  with  a  sword  I  had. 

The  same  form  of  verb  which  signifies  to  have,  signifies 
also  to  be,  in  the  sense  of  to  exist.  It  occurs  most  commonly 
in  the  words  hakuna  and  hapana  —  there  is  not 

Kuna  mtu,  there  is  somebody. 
Hakuna  mtu,  there  is  nobody. 
Hapana  mtu,  nobody  is  there. 
Kulikuwa  (or  Falikuwa)  na  mtu,  there  was  a  man. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

There  is  nobody  in  the  house.  There  is  nobody  who  knows  how  to 
conquer  him.  There  is  nothing  outside.  I  sought  for  a  knife,  but 
there  is  no  knife.  I  saw  a  sword  in  his  hand  ;  I  looked  again,  and  he 
had  no  sword ;  even  now  there  is  none.  There  was  somebody,  now 
there  is  nobody. 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 

The  verb  to  be  is  used  in  Swahili  to  form  compound  tenses 
in  a  manner  very  similar  to  that  in  which  it  is  used  in 
English.  The  verb  to  have  is  not  used  as  an  auxiliary  in 
Swahili. 

The  present  and  past  participles  in  English  are  represented 
in  Swahili  by  the  ki  and  me  tenses. 

Nalikuwa  nikitoka,  /  was  going  out. 
Nalikuwa  nimetoka,  /  was  gone  out. 

The  most  useful  compound  tenses  are  the  past  imperfect, 
the  future  of  a  continuing  action,  and  the  pluperfect 

Nalikuwa  nikienda,  I  was  going. 
Nitakuwa  nikienda,  I  shall  be  on  my  way. 
Nalikuwa  nimekwenda,  I  had  gone. 
Sikuwa  nikija,  /  was  not  coming. 

The  verb  kuisha  or  kwisha  is  veiy  commonly  used  to  give 
emphasis  to  a  past  or  perfect  tense. 

Amekwisha  kuja,  he  has  finished  to  CQTM,  he  is  come  already^,  he  it 
certainly  come. 


74  SWAHILI   EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

I  was  not  going  to  the  town,  but  shall  go  back  now.  He  was  eating. 
I  did  not  see  him,  he  had  passed  already.  The  thief  had  stolen  some 
money.  Had  you  read  the  book  ?  I  had  not  read  it.  I  was  looking 
at  it.  The  fishermen  were  on  the  sea,  they  had  found  a  few  fishes  in 
the  night.  The  boys  were  cultivating  their  plantation.  He  had 
fastened  the  door.  I  had  cut  their  fingers.  I  shall  be  cutting  down 
their  date  trees.  He  was  eating  his  food.  He  has  done  eating.  They 
were  stealing  cocoanuts  at  my  shamba.  The  slaves  were  telling  me  all 
the  news  of  the  thieves.  The  overlooker  was  going,  but  the  slave  girls 
had  run  away.  I  shall  be  going  out  from  the  house.  He  was  entering 
at  the  door.  I  saw  you,  you  were  boxing  my  slave  boy's  ears. 


DERIVATIVE  VERBS. 

A  verb  in  Swahili  may  be  made  causative,  neuter,  or 
reciprocal,  by  a  change  in  its  termination.  Another  change 
supplies  the  place  of  an  English  preposition.  Thus,  kuleta 
is  to  bring,  but  bring  to  me  is  not  expressed  by  leta  kwa  mimi; 
the  proper  expression  is  niletea ;  the  -e-  inserted  before  the 
final  -a  takes  the  place  of  the  preposition  to,  as  it  would 
equally  well  that  of  any  other.  In  the  simple  form  the 
thing  brought  is  the  object  of  the  verb,  in  the  prepositional 
or  applied  form  the  person  to,  for,  etc.,  whom  it  is  brought, 
is  the  object  of  the  verb.  Consequently,  in  the  passive,  ku- 
letwa  means  to  be  brought,  kuletewa^  to  be  brought  tot  Le.,  to 
have  brought  to  one. 

Waraka  umeletwa,  a  letter  has  been  brought. 
Nimeletewa  waraka,  /  have  had  a  letter  brought  me. 

The  vowel  inserted  before  the  final  -a  is  -e-y  if  the  vowel 
of  the  verb  immediately  preceding  is  -o-  or  -e- 
What  are  the  applied  forms  of — 

Kuomba.  Kuoga.  Kuleta.  Kujenga.  Kuseta.  Kuponya.  Ku- 
kokota.  Kuota.  Kueleza.  Kuona.  Kutoka.  Kuondoka.  Kutweka. 
Kucheka.  Kulegeza.  Kukosa.  Kuweka.  Kusema.  Kupeleka. 
Kunena.  Kungoja.  Kuosha.  Kuenda. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

He  prayed  for  me.  I  brought  him  the  book.  They  built  us  a  wall 
I  will  cure  your  slave  for  you.  I  dreamed  about  the  chief.  The  old 


DERIVATIVE   VERBS.  75 

man  explained  to  us  the  sound  we  had  heard.  I  see  evil  for  you.  A 
place  we  shall  go  out  at  I  rose  to  him.  We  hoisted  a  flag  for  the 
chief.  The  cook  put  away  much  food  for  the  children.  I  waited 
upon  him  many  days.  Wash  these  plates  for  me.  He  went  by  this 
road. 

The  vowel  inserted  before  the  final  -a  is  -/-  when  the 
preceding  vowel  is  -a-,  -i~,  or  -u-. 

Kufanya,  to  make,  Kufanyia,  Co  make  for ,  out  of,  etc. 

What  are  the  applied  forms  of — 

Kupiga.  Kufika.  Kuuliza.  Kuamka.  Kuuma.  Kuvunja  Kuita. 
Kukamata.  Kugeuka.  Kupanda.  Kukusanya.  Kuvuka.  Kulima. 
Kukata.  Kulinda.  Kukana.  Kuchimba.  Kuvuta.  Kufukuza.  Ku- 
mwaga.  Kupunguka.  Kuisha.  Kukunja.  Kupata.  Kushuka.  Ku- 
fisha.  Kuacha.  Kutazama.  Kutafuta.  Kupima.  Kulipa.  Kuimba. 
Kusikitika.  Kusimama.  Kutupa.  Kufunga.  Kufuta. 

Translate  into  Swahili. 

I  want  you  to  beat  this  man  for  me.  I  shall  ask  about  the  cook. 
You  have  broken  my  knife  for  me.  I  do  not  know  what  I  was  called 
for.  The  net  which  you  catch  animals  with.  The  caravan  porters 
turned  from  me.  They  climbed  up  to  me.  The  chief  gathered  all  his 
people  to  them.  I  do  not  see  the  canoe  they  crossed  in.  We  are  cul- 
tivating for  the  chief.  Cut  me  a  stick.  He  denied  to  the  chief  the 
words  he  hid  from  me.  I  shall  not  dig  for  you.  Drive  the  slaves  from 
us.  The  fishermen  were  looking  for  a  ship.  He  refused  to  measure 
the  road  for  me.  The  slave  women  were  singing  to  the  overlooker  at 
your  plantation,  and  [he]  he  was  paying  money  to  them.  I  am  sorry 
for  you.  Throw  the  spear  at  him.  Fasten  the  door  against  them. 
The  chief  was  sung  to  by  our  people.  I  was  pelted  [thrown  stones 
at]  by  the  youths.  I  had  a  plantation  left  to  me.  I  was  pitied 
[sikitikiwa.] 

Verbs  which  end  in  two  vowels  insert  an  -/-  in  making 
their  applied  form. 

Kufungua,  to  ttnfasten. 

Kufungulia,  to  unfasten  tot  otfor,  etc. 

Kung'oa,  to  root  up. 

Kung'olea,  to  root  up  for,  with,  etc. 

What  are  the  applied  forms  of — 

Kusumbua.  Kuzaa,  Kuchukua.  Kuchagua.  Kupangua.  Knsikia. 
Kuzuia.  Kuamua.  Kulia.  Kununua.  Kupindua.  Kutia.  Kuvaa, 


76  SWAHILI    EXERCISES. 

Kutoa.  Kupokea.  Kukataa.  Kukaa.  Kusugua.  Kukimbia. 
Kunyoa.  Kupasua.  Kutwaa.  Kuvua.  Kurarua.  Kufunua. 
Kutembea. 

The  passives  of  these  applied  forms  are  often  used  as  the 
passives  of  the  simple  verb. 

Kutwaliwa,  to  be  taken  away,  to  have  taken  from  one. 
Kisu  changu  kimetwaliwa,  my  knife  has  been  taken. 
Nimetwaliwa  kisu  changu,  /  have  had  my  knife  taken  from  me. 

The  reason  for  this  use  seems  to  lie  in  the  difficulty  of 
pronouncing  the  regular  passive  form. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

Let  us  walk  about  the  town.  Unfasten  the  door  for  us.  Uncover 
the  pot  for  the  cook.  I  took  off  my  sandals  in  his  honour  [for  him]. 
They  have  taken  from  me  my  children.  Give  me  an  axe  that  I  may 
split  the  planks  with  it.  Where  is  the  razor  I  was  shaved  with? 
They  want  a  city  for  them  to  flee  to  it.  Rub  the  table  for  us.  The 
kings  did  not  refuse  to  him  his  request.  The  first  man  received  the 
money  for  the  second.  I  have  put  out  the  money  for  you.  The  trees 
have  all  been  pulled  up.  I  have  had  all  my  trees  pulled  up.  He  was 
lifted  up.  The  slave  killed  the  animal  for  his  chief.  Unfasten  the 
door  for  me. 

Verbs  in  -e  make  their  prepositional  form  in-  ea. 

Kusamehe,  to  forgive.  Kusamehea,  to  forgive  to. 

Verbs  in  -/  and  -u  make  their  prepositional  form  in  ~ta. 

Kukubali,  to  accept.  Kusifu,  to  praise. 

Kukubalia,  to  accept  for,  Kusifia,  to  f  raise  for. 

Verbs  ending  in  au-  make  their  prepositional  forms  in 
-aulia. 

Kusahau,  to  forget. 

Kusahaulia,  to  forget  in  regard  to. 

The  passive  of  -these  prepositional  forms  is  used  as  the 
passive  of  the  simple  verbs. 

Kuharibiwa,  to  be  destroyed. 

What  are  the  prepositional  forms  and  passives  of  the 
following  verbs — 

Kubatili.  Kushtaki.  Kukubali.  Kubadili.  Kuhubiri.  Kujibu. 
Kuwasili.  Kuhimili.  Kusihi.  Kusadiki.  Kuamini.  Kujelidi.  Ku- 


DERIVATIVE  VERBS.  77 

hariki.  Kukirithi.  Kuzabuni.  Kutakabathi.  Kudiriki.  Kuathibu. 
Kuhitari.  Kutahiri.  Kushawishi.  Kukaribu.  Kufariji.  Kuamuru. 
Kuhitimu.  Kusetiri.  Kukiri.  Kutumaini.  Kulikiri.  Kusahihi. 
Kuwakifu.  Kutamani.  Kuhuluku.  Kusulibi.  Kuvinjari.  Kulaani. 
Kuthubutu.  Kufariki.  Kuthalimu.  Kufawiti.  Kuhini.  Kuuzulu. 
Kustahili.  Kufathili.  Kutharau.  Kuasi.  Kustarehe.  Kuhusudu. 
Kutanafusi.  Kuketi.  Kustahimili.  Kuhakiki.  Kusayili.  Kutahidi. 
Kufasiri.  Kubaini.  Kufurahi.  Kusitawi.  Kutabiri.  Kubashiri. 
Kusabau.  Kukabithi.  Kunathiri.  Kumiliki.  Kuthani.  Kuhami. 
Kuthuru.  Kuauni.  Kuarifu.  Kuhifathi.  Kurudi.  Kutuhumu. 
Kugharimu.  Kufuturu.  Kusakifu.  Kurissimu.  Kuhalifu.  Ku- 
kabili.  Kusamehe.  Kusubiri.  Kudumu.  Kulaabu.  Kuabudu. 
Kuhutubu.  Kuafu.  Kukirihi.  Kusujudu.  Kufidi.  Kutubu. 
Kusbutumu.  Kuhui.  Kutilifu.  Kukinai.  Kufilisi.  Kufitini.  Ku- 
saki.  Kudai.  Kuruzuku.  Kuthamini.  Kuhadithi.  Kushuhudu, 
Kusafiri.  Katadariki.  Kujeruhi.  Kustaajabu. 

There  are  two  uses  of  the  applied  form  which  should  be 
remembered : —  « 

1.  Where  something  is  described  as  serving  a  certain  pur- 
pose, in  Swahili  the  applied  form  of  the  verb  is  used  preceded 
by  the  particle  -a. 

A  knife  to  cut  meat  with,  kisu  cha  kukatia  nyama. 
A  place  to  go  out  at,  mahali  pa  kutokea. 

2.  The  applied  form  followed  by  mbali  denotes  that  the 
thing  is  done  fully  and  finally. 

Afie  mbali,  that  he  may  die  out  of  the  way, 
Katupia  mbali,  and  throw  it  clean  away. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

An  axe  to  split  firewood  with.  A  word  to  answer  him  with.  A  stick 
to  beat  a  dog  with.  A  wind  blew  the  papers  clean  away.  The  men 
want  poles  to  build  with.  I  see  no  man  [I  do  not  see  a  man]  to  call  to. 
I  have  porters  to  carry  for  me.  I  see  a  place  to  climb  up  to.  A  pot  to 
cook  sweet  potatoes  in.  They  cut  a  mast  away.  The  slaves  have  hoes 
to  cultivate  with.  A  rope  to  draw  a  cart  with.  The  chief  drove  his 
enemies  away  altogether.  I  do  not  find  words  to  explain  my  meaning 
with.  Where  is  a  chain  to  fasten  him  with  ?  The  birds  flew  away. 
Give  me  [some]  long  nails  [msomari]  to  fasten  the  planks  with.  Let  us 
kill  them  all  out  of  the  way.  Push  the  stone  away  altogether.  A  bed- 
stead to  rest  upon.  Bring  water  to  wash  the  plates  with.  I  have  a  cloth 
to  wipe  them  with  afterwards. 


;  "  SWAHILI  EXERCISES. 

RECIPROCAL  VERBS. 

Verbi  are  made  reciprocal  by  changing  the  final  -a  into 
•ana, 

Kupenda,  to  lave.  Kupendana,  to  love  one  another. 

Verbs  ending  in  e-t  *-,  or  -u  make  their  reciprocal  upon 
their  applied  forms. 

Kuharibu,  to  destroy.  Kuharibiana,  to  destroy  one  another. 

What  are  the  reciprocal  forms  denoting — 

To  accuse  one  another.  To  answer  one  another.  To  annoy  one 
another.  To  call  one  another.  To  cheat  one  another.  To  cure  one 
another.  To  defend  one  another.  To  fear  one  another.  To  feed 
one  another.  To  find  one  another.  To  forgive  one  another.  To  hate 
one  another.  To  help  one  another.  To  take  leave  of  one  another. 
To  meet  with  one  another.  To  please  one  another.  To  praise  one 
another.  To  scorn  one  another.  To  teach  one  another.  To  tell  one 
another. 

\ 
NEUTER  VERBS. 

A  Neuter  Verb,  with  a  signification  approaching  that  of 
the  passive,  is  formed  by  changing  the  final  -a  into  -ka. 

Kufungua,  to  unfasten.  Kufunguka,  to  be  unfastened. 

Where  the  final  -a  is  preceded  by  a  consonant,  or  the 
verb  ends  in  -e,  -i,  or  -u,  the  neuter  is  made  from  the  applied 
form. 

Kuvunja,  to  break.  Kukatika,  to  part,  come  in  two. 

Kuvunjika,  to  be  broken.  Kuharibu,  to  destroy. 

Kukata,  to  cut.  Kuharibika,  to  be  destroyed. 

Verbs  ending  in  -sha  change  -sha  into  -ka  to  form  the 
neuter. 

Kustusha,  to  startle.  Kustuka,  t«  it  startled,  to  start. 

What  are  the  neuter  forms  answering  to — 
To  be  wiped.     To  be  washed.     To  be  used.     To  be  uncovered.    To 
be  torn.     To  be  split     To  be  spilt    To  be  shaken.    To  be  sewn.     To 
be  searched  for.     To  be  scorned.     To  be  scattered.     To  be  pulled. 


DERIVATIVE   VERBS.  79 

To  be  lifted  up.  To  be  lowered.  To  be  passed.  To  be  ground.  To 
be  forgotten.  To  be  folded.  To  be  bought.  To  be  accepted.  To  be 
annoyed. 

CAUSATIVE  VERBS. 

Verbs  are  made  causative  by  changing  their  final  syllable 
to  -za  or  -ska. 

Kupunguza,  to  make  lest.  Kupasha,  to  make,  to  give. 

Verbs  ending  in  -ka  change  -ka  into  -sha. 

Kushuka,  to  go  down,  Kushusha,  to  make  to  go  down. 

Verbs  ending  in  -fa  change  -fa  into  -sa.  «] 

Kufuata,  to  follow.  Kufuasa,  to  make  to  follow. 

Verbs  ending  in  -a  preceded  by  a  consonant,  and  verbs 
ending  in  -e,  -i,  or  -u,  make  their  causatives  on  their  applied 
forms. 

Kupenda,  to  love.  Kupendeza,  to  please. 

Kuharibu,  to  destroy.  Kuharibisha,  to  make  to  destroy. 

Kuzidi,  to  become  greater.  Kuzidisha,  to  make  greater. 

It  is  not  easy  to  know  when  to  use  -za  and  when  -sha. 
The  first  refers  rather  to  causing  an  action,  the  other  to 
causing  a  state.  In  the  following  lists  the  verbs  in  the  first 
paragraph  use  -za,  those  in  the  second  -sha.  The  third 
paragraph  contains  those  which  follow  the  previous  rules. 

What  are  the  causative  forms  of — 

1.  Kuchukia.      Kujaa.      Kuzoea.     Kufanya.     Kuingia.     Kugomba. 
Kukwea.      Kushangaa.      Kutulia.      Kuchukua.      Kugeua.      Kuelea. 
Kuokoa.       Kukataa.      Kukimbia.      Kulekea.      Kutimia.      Kupenya. 
Kuregea.     Kukua.     Kupoa.     Kusikilia.     Kupotea.     Kujongea.     Ku- 
sogea.     Kulipa.     Kutegemea.     Kuenea.     Kukwaa.     Kulia. 

2.  Kuweza.    Kujumla.    Kubadili.    Kukaribu.    Kupanda.    Kupofua 
Kuvuma.      Kukosa.     Kusumbua.    Kupatana.     Kukoma.     Kukutana, 
Kulingana.     Kusulibi.     Kufurahi.      Kupigana.      Kushiba.     Kukopo, 
Kurudi.      Kuinama.      Kukwama.      Kuziba.      Kuthubutu.     Kutatana. 
Kuwasili.     Kustarehe.     Kuthani.    Kusafiri.     Kutaajabu. 

3.  Kuepuka.     Kuteta.     Kutaabika.    Kuondoka.    Kuamka.    Kupo- 


8o  SWAHILI    EXERCISES. 

fuka.  Kuchemka.  Kutakata.  Kuvuka.  Kuokota.  Kucheka.  Kj 
kauka.  Kuanguka.  Kukumbuka.  Kuwaka.  Kuruka.  Kunyoka. 
Kutikita.  Kufingirika.  Kutota.  Kukasirika.  Kuzunguka. 

Translate  into  Swahili — 

Our  work  is  done.     We  can  now  write  Swahili  like  a  man  who  was 
horn  in  Zanzibar.     The  people  will  wonder  at  us.     If  a  man  asks  us  a 
we  know  words  which  are  correct  to  answer  him  with. 


SWAHILI    EXERCISES. 
KEY. 

PLURAL  OF  SUBSTANTIVES. 
(page  i) 

Vitendo.  Mishale.  Vikapo.  Mibuyu.  Vitanda.  Vi- 
bofu.  Vipofu.  Mifupa.  Vitabu.  Mipaka.  Mizigo. 
Vifungo.  Mizinga.  Mitumbwi.  Misafara.  Mikufu.  Viti 
Wafalme.  Watoto.  Videvu.  Minazi.  Mibuni.  Vitana. 
Wapishi.  Vizibo.  Vikombe.  Mitende.  ViziwL  Mila- 
ngo.  Walevi.  Wazungu.  Vidole.  Wavuvi.  Viroboto. 
Miguu.  Vivuko.  Wageni.  Michezo.  Walinzi.  Mikono. 
Vipini.  Vitwa.  Wachunga.  Vilima.  Viboko.  Vibanda. 
Wakalimani  Visiwa.  Visu.  Vifuniko.  Mistari.  Midorao. 
Wajusi.  Mikate.  Vioo.  Vitanzi.  Wachiro.  Milingote. 
Waganga.  Misiba.  Vinu.  Milima.  Vinwa.  Walezi. 
Viapo.  Wazee.  Vitunguu.  Wasimamizi.  Michikichi. 
Vipande.  Mito.  Vipele.  MitL  WapagazL  Viazi 
Vigai.  Vifuko.  Vitambaa.  Vidaka.  Vifaru.  Mito. 
Watoro.  Mitai.  Watumishi.  VivulL  Viatu.  Wago- 
njwa.  Wajinga.  Watumwa.  Watwana.  VijakazL  Waja- 
kazi.  WajolL  Mikeka.  Vidonda.  Mikuke.  Mitambo. 
Mikia,  Vijiko.  Viko.  Miji.  Mitego.  Vilemba,  Miza- 
bibu.  Visibau.  Mitungi  Visima.  Mijeledi.  Wake, 
i  Vijan^ 

a 


S3  SWAHILI   EXERCISES  :    KEY. 

AGREEMENT  OF  ADJECTIVES. 
(page  4) 

Kitendo  kibaya.  Mshale  mrefu.  Vikapo  vitupu.  Mibu- 
yu  minene.  Kitanda  kipana.  Mfupa  mgumu.  Kitabu 
kikukuu.  Mizigo  mizito.  Kifungo  kizurl  Mizinga 
mikubwa.  Mtumbwi  mfupi.  Misafara  migeni.  Mkufu 
mnene.  Kiti  kipya.  Wafalme  wakuu.  Mtoto  mzuri.  Vide- 
vu  virefu.  Mbuni  mzuri.  Vitana  vidogo.  Mpishi  mvivu. 
Vizibo  vigumu.  Kikombe  kitupu.  Mitende  mifupl  Mi- 
lango  mipana,  Mlevi  mkali.  Wazungu  wake.  Kidole 
kinene.  Wavuvi  wawivu.  Miguu  mitupu.  Kivuko  kipana. 
Wageni  wavivu.  Mchezo  mzuri.  Walinzi  wakali.  Mkono 
mzima.  Vipini  virefu.  Kitwa  kikavu.  Wachunga  wabaya 
Kilima  kikubwa.  Kibanda  kikavu.  Mkalimani  mbaya. 
Visiwa  vikubwa.  Kisu  kikalL  Vifuniko  vizito.  Mstari 
mrefu.  Midomo  mikavu.  Wajusi  wakubwa.  Mkate 
mtamu.  Vioo  vipya.  Kitanzi  kirefu.  Wachiro  wake. 
Mlingote  mfupi.  Mganga  mgeni.  Misiba  mizito.  Kinu 
kipya.  Milima  mikubwa.  Vinwa  vipana.  Walezi  wawivu. 
Kiapo  kichungu.  Wazee  wazuri.  Kitunguu  kibovu.  Wasi- 
mamizi  wakali.  Michikichi  midogo.  Vipande  vifupi. 
Mto  mgumu.  Miti  mirefu.  Mpagazi  mvivu.  Viazi  vibichi. 
Kigai  kikalL  Vifuko  vitupu.  Kitambaa  kikukuu.  Vidaka 
vipana.  Wajinga  wagenl  Mtumwa  mpya.  Wajakazi  wa- 
vivu. Watwana  wabaya.  Mjoli  mwivu.  Vidonda  viwazi. 
Mkuke  mzito.  Mito  mipana.  Kiatu  kipya.  Watumishi 
wabaya.  Kivuli  kirefu.  Mikeka  mikukuu.  Kijiko  kidogo. 
Mikia  mirefu.  Kiko  kifupi.  Miji  mikubwa.  Mtego  mtupu. 
Vilemba  vizuri.  Mzabibu  mzuri.  Visibau  virefu.  Mtungi 
mtupu.  Mijeledi  mizito.  Mke  mwivu.  Viazi  vikubwa 
vibichi.  Mizigo  mingapi?  Vibanda  vingapi?  Mikate 
mingapi?  Wapishi  wangapi  ?  Milima  mingapi  ?  Wajinga 
wangapi?  Miji  mingapi?  Vipande  vingapi?  Mitungi 
mingapi  ?  Visu  vingapi  ? 


SWAH1LI   EXERCISES  :    KEY 

NUMBERS. 


Mtu  mmoja.  Kilemba  kimoja.  Kisu  kimoja.  Mti 
mmoja.  Kifuko  kimoja.  Mtumwa  mmoja.  Mto  mmoja. 
Mtungi  mmoja.  Mizigo  mi  will.  Vifungo  vitatu.  Mizinga 
minne.  Mitumbwi  mitano.  Misafara  sita.  Mikufu  saba. 
Vita  vinane.  Wafalme  kenda.  Watoto  kumi.  Mnazi 
mdogo  mmoja.  Mibuni  mikubwa  miwill  Vitana  virefu 
vitatu.  Wapishi  wavivu  wanne.  Vizibo  vibaya  vitano. 
Vikombe  vidogo  sita.  Mitende  mikubwa  saba.  Milango 
mipana  tissa.  Wazungu  wafupi  kuml  Kidole  kinene  ki- 
moja, Miguu  mipana  mitatu.  Vipini  virefu  vinne.  Vilima 
vikubwa  vitano.  Vibanda  vipya  saba.  Wakalimani  wabaya 
wanane.  Visu  vikali  kenda.  Mistari  mirefu  kumL  Mchiro 
mkali  mmoja. 

THIS  AND  THAT. 
(page  6) 

Kitendo  kizuri  hiki.  Mishale  mirefu  ile.  Mbuyu  mnene 
huu.  Vitanda  vile.  Kibofu  hiki.  Mifupa  migumu  hiL  Ki- 
tabu  kikubwa  hiki.  Mpaka  huu.  Mizigo  mizito  ile.  Vifu- 
ngo hizi.  Mizinga  mikubwa  ile.  Msafara  huu.  Mikufu  hiL 
Kiti  kile.  Wafalme  wale.  Watoto  hawa.  Mnazi  huu. 
Mbuni  ule.  Vitana  hivL  Mpishi  huyu.  Kizibo  hiki.  Ki- 
kombe  kile.  Mtende  ule.  Milango  hii.  Mlevi  huyu. 
Wazungu  hawa.  Kidole  hiki.  Wavuviwale.  Miguu  ile.  M- 
guu  huu.  Kivuko  hiki.  Mgeni  huyu.  Michezo  hit  Walinzi 
hawa.  Mikono  hii.  Vipini  hivi.  Mchunga  yule.  Kilima  ki- 
dogo  hiki.  Vibanda  vidogo  vile.  Wakalimani  wale.  Visiwa 
tikubwa  vile.  Kisu  kirefu  kile.  Kifuniko  hiki.  Mistarl 
minene  hii.  Midomo  minene  hiL  Wajusi  wazuri  wale. 
Mikate  mitamu  ile.  Mlingote  mrefu  ule,  Mlima  mkubwa 
ule.  Wazee  hawa.  Vitunguu  vibichi  vile.  Kipele  hiki. 
Mti  ule.  Wapagazi  wavivu  wale.  Viazi  vidogo  hivi.  Ki- 
gai  kikali  kile.  Vitambaa  vikukuu  vile.  Mjinga  yule 


84  SWAHILI    EXERCISES  :    KEY. 

Watumwa  wavivu  hawa.  Mkuke  mzito  mfupi  ule.  Kiatu 
kikukuu  kile.  Watumishi  wale.  Mikeka  mipya  ile.  Kiko 
hiki.  Mitego  hii.  Vilemba  vizuri  vile.  Visibau  vizuri 
hivi.  Mitungi  mipya  hii.  Kisima  hiki.  Wachawi  hawa. 

(page  7) 

VVatu  hawa  wakali.  Milima  hii  mikubwa.  Watumwa 
hawa  wavivu.  Miti  ile  midogo.  Mtu  yule  mfupl  Mkukc 
huu  mzito.  Wazungu  hawa  wawivu. 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 
(page  7) 

Mimi  mkali.  Wewe  mfupi.  Yeye  mkubwa.  Wao  wa- 
dogo.  Sisi  wazito.  Ninyi  wakavu.  Hivi  (or  vile)  vipya. 
Hiki  (or  kile)  kikukuu.  Hivi  (or  vile)  vikukuu.  Huu  (or 
uie)  mnene.  Wao  wavivu.  Kivi  (or  vile)  vibivu.  Yeye 
mdogo.  Yeye  mkali.  Yeye  mgeni.  Mimi  mwivu.  Ninyi 
wawivu.  Wao  wazuri.  Huu  (or  ule)  mtupu.  Yeye  mfupi 
Wewe  mkubwa.  Ninyi  wakubwa, 

(page  8) 

Mti  huu  u  mdogo.  Mtende  ule  u  mfupi.  Mzee  huyu  yu 
mkuu.  Tu  wakavu.  Miti  ile  i  mirefu.  Mtu  mdogo  yule 
yu  mkali  Kisu  kile  ki  kikali.  U  mvivu.  Yu  mvivu.  Yu 
mdogo.  Yu  mzuri.  Yu  mfupi.  Ki  kizito.  Ki  kirefu.  Ki 
kibichi.  Vi  vibivu.  Wa  wazuri.  U  mfupi.  Ki  kikukuu. 
Vi  vikukuu.  Vi  vipya.  Vi  vipya,  I  mibovu.  Ki  kipya. 

(page  8) 

Mshale  ule  umevunjika.  Kikapo  kimeanguka.  Mbuyu 
umeanguka.  Kitanda  kikukuu  kile  kimevunjika.  Mzee 
amekufa.  Mfupa  mkubwa  umevunjika.  Kitabu  kipya  kime- 
pasuka.  Mpaka  umeonekana.  Mzigo  mzito  umeanguka. 
Vifungo  vimevunjika.  Mitumbwi  imeonekana.  Msafara 
mkubwa  umeonekana.  Mikufu  minene  imevunjika.  Mkufu 
umeanguka.  Wafalme  wakuu  wamekufa.  Mtoto  mdogp 


SWAHILI    EXERCISES  I    KEY.  85 

alilekufa.  Mnazi  mrefu  ule  umeanguka.  Mtungi  mkukuu 
umevunjika.  Kitana  kidogo  kimevunjika.  Mpishi  ameo- 
nekana.  Kikombe  kimevunjika.  Vikombe  vipya  hivi  vi- 
mevunjika.  Mitende  miwili  imeanguka.  Milango  minne 
imevunjika.  Mlevi  yule  ameanguka.  Wazungu  saba  wa- 
mekufa.  Vidole  viwili  vimevunjika. 

INTERROGATIVES. 


Watu  gani  hawa  ?  Mishale  ipi  ?  Vikapo  gani  ?  Mbuyu 
upi  ?  Kitanda  gani  hiki  ?  Nani  mzee  huyu  ?  Mfupa  gani 
huu  ?  Vitabu  vipi  ?  Vifungo  gani  ?  Mtumbwi  upi  ?  Mku- 
fu  gani?  Kiti  kipi?  Wafalme  gani  hawa?  Mtoto-yupi? 
Minazi  ipi  ?  Mtende  upi  ?  Nani  mlevi  huyu  ?  Mfalme 
gani  mlevi  huyu?  Miti  gani  ile?  Mkono  upi?  Mchezo 
gani  huu  ?  Kilima  kipi  ?  Visiwa  vipi  vile  ?  Kitu  gani  kisu 
hiki  ?  Mtu  gani  mkalimani  huyu  ?  Mlingote  upi  ?  Msiba 
gani  ?  Milima  gani  ile  ?  Mti  gani  mchikichi  ?  Nini  kiapo  ? 
Msimamizi  gani  kipofu  ?  Mzee  yupi  kiziwi  ?  Yupi  mga- 
nga  ?  Mti  gani  ?  Miti  ipi  ? 

THE  VERBS. 
(page  13) 

Nimekubali.  Utashtakl  Tumepatana.  Vitabadili  Wa- 
tasumbua.  Nilijibu.  Inazaa.  Kipofu  anaomba.  Ninasa- 
diki.  Wafalme  wamefika.  Wajinga  wanauliza.  Kiboko 
anaamka.  Tutaoga.  Viroboto  watauma.  AVatoto  wanaji- 
sifu.  Watoto  wanne  wamezaliwa.  Wazungu  wamenunua, 
Mpishi  alijenga,  Mlinunua.  Wazee  waliita.  Anaangalia, 
\\'apagazi  wanachukua.  Msimamizi  alidaka.  Mtende  ume- 
geuka.  Waganga  wamedanganya.  Mfalme  atachagua. 
Wachunga  wanapiga  makofi.  Mtoto  atapanda.  Mzungu 
atashinda.  Ninafikiri.  Mpishi  amepika,  Wanakohoa, 
Kifuniko  kilifunika.  Msafara  ule  umevuka.  Watoto  hawa 
watalia.  Watumwa  watalima.  Visu  vikali  vile  vitakata. 


86  SWAHILI   EXERCISES  :    KEY. 

Wajakazi  wanacheza.  Misiba  inapungua.  Watumwa  wabaya 
wale  wanakawia.  Watwana  walichimba.  Tutagawanya. 
Amefanya.  Watumwa  wale  wameteka  maji.  Nimepiga 
mstari.  Mzee  yule  aliota.  Kitunguu  kimekauka.  Walevi 
wanapigana.  Mshale  uliingia,  Miti  mirefu  ilianguka.  Wa- 
zungu  sita  wamelewa.  Mkate  umeoza,  "Wajakazi  wanasaga. 
Mfalme  alitangulia.  Ulisikiliza.  Utapika.  Ninatafuta. 
Mzee  ameoa.  Kipande  kile  kimeyeyuka.  Watalipa.  Tuli- 
okota.  Mfalme  mkali  alifanikiwa.  Unasukuma.  Ninaso- 
ma,  Mfalme  alikataa.  Mtumwa  alijuta.  Wapagazi  wana- 
pumzika,  Mkono  ule  unavimba. 

THE    OBJECTIVE    PREFIX. 
(page  14) 

Kitendo  hiki  kinanisumbua,  Mshale  ulimpiga.  Mishale 
ile  iliwakosa.  Anachukua  vikapo  sita.  Mibuyu  mitatu 
imeanguka.  Wameleta  vitanda  viwilL  Wamevileta  vitanda 
viwili.  Utaiacha  mifupa.  Nimekiona  kitabu.  Wameipita 
mipaka,  Wapagazi  sita  wanaichukua  mizigo  kenda.  Una- 
kifungua  kifungo.  Watu  kumi  wanaikokota  mizinga  mikubwa 
miwili.  Watu  sita  waliusukuma  mtumbwi.  Ninaona  msafara. 
Uliiona  misafara  miwili.  Ataufunga  mkufu.  Mfalme  ameleta 
kiti.  Nitakipata  kiti  kile.  Wafalme  watanilipa.  Nilikuta 
watoto  wanne.  Umewapita  watoto.  Wazungu  wameikata 
minazi.  Mpishi  ameuvunja  mtungi  huu.  Kijakazi  amepata 
kitana  kizuri.  Mchunga  anampiga  mpishl  Ninataka  mpi- 
shl  Nimekikata  kizibo.  Ameokota  kikombe.  Mitende 
miwili  ile  inazaa.  Mlango  umeoza.  Wazungu  wamemua 
mpishi  mvivu  yule.  Kidole  hiki  kinaniuma.  Wavuvi  kumi 
wanarudl  Nimeua  viroboto  saba.  Kipini  kiliupiga  mguu. 
Waliwaona  wageni.  Walinzi  walikimbia.  Waliinua  mikono 
miwili.  Tuliiona  mikono.  Tulipita  vilima  viwili  Wazungu 
waliua  viboko  sita.  Wageni  walijenga  vibanda  viwili.  Mfalme 
aliviteketeza  vibanda  viwili.  Mkalimani  mdogo  alijisifu. 
Mkalimani  alinionyesha  visiwa  vikubwa  viwili.  Umekipokea 
tisu<  Mpishi  anakisugua  kifuniko.  Alinionyesha  mstari. 


SWAHILI  EXERCISES:  KEY  87 

Mgeni  ameukata  mkate.  Nimevivunja  vioo.  Milingote  mi- 
wili  imevunjika.  Nimeuona  mlima  mdogo.  Mlezi  anawa- 
lisha  watoto.  Wazee  wanasikiliza.  Nimevionja  vitunguu. 
Msimamizi  anawapiga  watumwa.  Ninatafuta  mchikichi. 
Mchiro  amekiuma  kipande  kile.  Mtumwa  ataleta  mto.  Miti 
imefika.  Nitawalipa  wapagazi.  Viazi  vimeoza.  Wataviseta 
vigai.  Alikileta  kifuko  kitupu.  Tulikitatua  kitambaa.  Ni- 
liona  vidaka  sita.  Watumwa  walijipenda.  Mfalme  anajisifu. 
Umejifunga.  Watoto  walijilisha.  Watajithuru.  Wajinga 
wanajipindua.  Watumwa  wavivu  wajikuna. 


VOWEL  ROOTS. 
(page  17) 

Niliona  watu  wekundu  wanne.  Watu  weusi  wawili  wall- 
ona  mtu  mweupe.  Mstari  huu  mwembamba.  Nilipiga 
mstari  mweusi.  Moto  unawaka.  Mizigo  hii  mepesi.  Mizigo 
meusi  ile  mizito.  Moyo  mwepesi.  Moshi  mzito.  Tutauona 
moshi  mweusi.  Tutaacha  mioto  mikubwa  miwili.  Umeisa- 
hau  mioyo  ile.  Miaka  ile  mifupi.  Waalimu  wawili  walinifu- 
ndisha.  Mwamba  mweupe  umezama.  Nimemwambia 
mwamuzi.  Waamuzi  wanne  walitusikia.  Utamwita  mwa- 
ndishi.  Niliusikia  mwanzo  mbaya.  Mianzo  mema  miwili. 
Waashi  wawili  walijenga  vibanda  viwili.  Mwashi  huyu  alitu- 
mia  miti  mingi.  Wazungu  walinunua  miavuli  mikubwa 
mingi.  Wanaikata  miembe  mema  ile.  Tumewapita  wenyewe. 
Mwezi  mzuri  umezama.  Miezi  hii  mema,  ile  mibaya.  Miiba 
miwili  iliuingia  mkono.  Miiko  hii  mikubwa  mizuri.  Wevi 
walikimbia.  Wevi  werevu  wawili  waliutwaa  mtumbwi. 
Waoga  walimwogopa  mzee. 

(page  1 8) 

Chakula  chema.  Mvuvi  amekitwaa  chambo.  Vyango 
vyeusi  vitano  hivi.  Nimenunua  vyanu  vikubwa  kumt  Cheo 
hiki  kifupi.  Nimepata  vyeti  viwili.  Aliona  chombo  che- 
kundu  kimoja.  Nimeona  vyombo  vyeusi  sita.  Vyura  vye- 
revu  kuml  Chuma  kizito.  Vyuma  hivi  vyepesi.  Umeleta 


88  SWAHILI    EXERCISES  :    KEY. 

chungu  chekundu  kimoja.  Nitataka  vyungu  vyeusi  vidogo 
vitatu.  Utakichukua  chuo  kikubwa  kile.  Anachukua  vyuo 
vyekundu  vinene  viwili.  Nilikitwaa  chusa  kikubwa. 

VOWEL  TENSES. 
(page  18) 

Mfalme  ataka  chombo  kikubwa.  Mwembe  mkubwa 
walianguka.  Kisu  hiki  chataka  kipini  kikubwa.  Mfalme 
apenda  wazee.  Waashi  wataka  miavuli  mekundu.  Miti 
yakizunguka  kibanda.  Chambo  champendeza.  Watumwa 
walinichukia,  Wageni  walituogopa.  Kifuniko  chafunika 
vyungu  viwili.  Waliviona  vyeti.  Chakula  hiki  chapendeza. 
Vitabu  vyalifika.  Walizaliwa.  Alijisifu.  Waliamka.  Miti 
mirefu  yalianguka.  Aliufunga  mlango.  Nampenda  mzee. 
Twawachukia.  Waliwaona  watumwa  weusi  wanne.  Wa- 
tumwa weusi  wanne  waliwaona.  Kibanda  chanipendeza. 

THE   POSSESSIVE  CASE. 
(page  19) 

Nalikitwaa  kisu  cha  Mzungu.  Nitauona  mji  wa  mfalme. 
Utakiuma  kitwa  cha  mzee.  Nimekiona  kisibau  cha  mlevi. 
Tumekipita  kisima  cha  Mzungu.  Nauona  moshi  mweusi 
wa  moto  mkubwa.  Wanaviteketeza  vyuo  vya  kiziwL  Wa- 
tumwa wa  mfalme  waliutwaa  mtumbwi  wa  mvuvi.  Kisu  cha 
mtumwa  chaliupiga  mkono  wa  mgeni.  Wameuficha  mlingote 
wa  mtumbwi.  Kiapo  cha  mzee.  Misiba  ya  mgeni.  Mi- 
kufu  ya  mtumwa  mvivu.  Mizigo  ya  wapagazl  Mlango  wa 
mpishi.  Midomo  ya  mlezi.  Mishale  ya  watoto.  Kibanda 
cha  kipofu.  Mkia  wa  mchiro.  Mchiro  ameuuma  mkono 
wa  mtoto.  Viatu  vya  Mzungu. 

POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 
(page  20) 

Mfalme  wetu  ameua  mtumwa  wako.  Wazungu  wamekata 
mitende  yao.  Mnazi  wangu  unazaa.  Kisu  chake  kikali. 


SWAHILI   EXERCISES:    KEY.  89 

Mshale  wake  ulinipiga.  Chombo  kikubwa  chao  kimezama. 
VValipenda  chakula  chao.  Kibanda  chetu  kimeanguka. 
Miti  yako  yanipendeza.  Mzee  ataka  kisibau  changu.  Kitwa 
changu  kinaniuma.  Mkono  wangu  unaugusa  mti.  Naona 
kipini  chake.  Nalichukua  mkufu  wake.  Mikufu  yako 
raizito.  Utawatwaa  watumwa  wetu.  Nitaiacha  mishale 
yako.  Vitendo  vyao  vimetupendeza.  Mtamchukia  mfalme 
wetu.  Watu  wetu  wachukia  wagesi.  Amekificha  kisu 
changu.  Mtu  wangu  anatwaa  kisibau  chako.  Mikuke  yao 
mirefu.  Moyo  wa  mvuvi  mwepesi.  Moshi  wa  moto  wao 
mwingi. 

HIM  AND  HIS. 
(page  21) 

Nalimpiga  mguu.  Alinipiga  kitwa.  Nalimfunga  miguu. 
Waliniuma  mikono.  Mchiro  alimuma  kidole.  Watumwa 
walinikata  kitwa.  Kisu  chalinigusa  mkono.  Wajakazi  wa- 
limsugua  miguu.  Alinikuna  mkono.  Mfalme  alimfungua 
mtumwa  mikono.  Amejiuma  jicho.  Atajifunga  mikono. 

ALL,  HAVING,  ITSELF,  BY  ITSELF. 
(page  22) 

Watumwa  wote.  Vitu  vyote.  Miti  yote.  Watumwa 
wote  wenyi  vibanda.  Vitu  vyote  vyenyi  mwisho.  Miti  yote 
peke  yao.  Nalimwona  peke  yake.  Naliwaona  watu  hawa 
wote  wawili.  Naweza  peke  yangu  kuuinua  mtungi  huu. 
Mlituona  sote.  Watakimbia  wote.  Wataitupa  mikuke  yote. 
Wevi  walivitwaa  vilemba  vyetu  vyote.  Tumeviona  vyote. 
Naliona  vivuli  vitatu,  waliona  kimoja  peke  yake.  Naliona 
mibuyu  miwili,  uliiona  yote.  Nalimwona  kiboko  mwenyewe. 
Naliiona  milima  yenyewe.  Wafalme  wenyi  vilemba  walinia- 
mbia.  Mchiro  mwenyi  mkia.  Mti  mwenyi  miiba  miingl 
Naliwaambia  wazee  sita  wenyi  miavull  Mfalme  mwenyewe 
aliitwaa  mikuke  yote  yenyi  vipini  vizuri.  Nalisimama  peke 
yangu.  Twalitazama  sote.  Miiko  yalikimbia  peke  yao. 
Mchawi  aliiona  yote.  Mchawi  aliwadanganya  wevi  wote  wa- 


90  SWAHILI    EXERCISES  :     KEY. 

will  Walitafuta  wote.   Mwezi  mwote  umeonekana.  Vyombo 
vyote  vitazama.     Vitabu  vikubwa  vyote. 

THE  RELATIVE. 

(page  23) 

Muungu  anayeniona.  Ninyi  mnaomwabudu  Muungu. 
Watu  walioabudu  miungu  mingL  Kivuli  kinachopita.  Wa- 
jakazi  wanaochukua  mitungi.  Mtu  atakayetupa  mkuke. 
Mkuke  utakaonipiga.  Utakayeuona  mkuke.  Mkuke  wake 
utakaoniua.  Wanaomjua.  Wataijua  miti  itakayoanguka. 
Miti  itakayoanguka  itakiseta  kibanda  chako.  Mtumwa  ali- 
yeleta  kiti.  Kiti  kilichovunjika.  Aliyekivunja  kiti.  Wajoli 
wake  watakaompiga.  Wajakazi  watakaocheka.  Wajinga 
watakaokimbia.  Mzungu  atakayeuvuka  mto.  Mzungu  ata- 
kayezama.  Watumishi  waliopenda  viazi.  Viazi  vinavyooza. 
Mzabibu  unaozaa.  Naliuona  mtende  uliozaa.  Utakiona 
kidonda  kinachomuma.  Wagonjwa  watakaotaajabu.  Mga- 
nga  atakayewaponya.  Wajinga  watakaomlipa  mchawi  aliye- 
wadanganya.  Mfalme  anayempenda  mke  wake.  Mfalme 
aliyewapenda  watoto  wake.  Mpishi  aliyepika  chakula  changu. 
Mturaishi  aliyeleta  chakula  changu.  Chakula  chema  kili- 
chowaua  wote. 

(page  24) 

Kitendo  ulichokifanya.  Kitanda  ulichokivunja,  Mfupa 
aliouokota.  Kitabu  walichokitwaa.  Mpaka  utakaoupita". 
Mizigo  waliyoichukua  wapagazi.  Mfalme  wanayemua. 
Watoto  aliowazaa.  Mlango  ninaoufunga.  Wazungu  uta- 
kaowaona.  Kidole  alichokiuma.  Mgeni  wanayempiga. 
Kilima  ulichokiona.  Kiboko  waliyemua.  Kibanda  alicho- 
kijenga.  Mzee  waliyemsukuma.  Vitunguu  mlivyovipenda. 
Kipande  mtakachokipokea.  Mti  utakaouweka. 

(page  25) 

Nitakapomwona.  Mgeni  alipoanguka.  Mzungu  ana- 
korudi.  Mtende  utakapozaa.  Tunaposimama.  Watu 
weusi  walikokimbia.  Chumba  alimokaa  kitako.  Wavuvi 


SWAHILI    EXERCISES  :     KEY.  9! 

walipoupindua  mtumbwi  wetu.      Mfalme  alipopita.     Mzee 
atakapoondoka.     Aliyeniona  nani  ?    Nani  anayetoka  ? 

IMPERATIVE  AND  SUBJUNCTIVE. 
(page  26) 

Mwite  mtu  aliyekupiga,  nimwone.  Mpige  aogope. 
Nimemwona  mtu  uliyemua,  nimzike?  Nitamshtaki  niku- 
sumbue.  Mwambie  anijibu.  Nakuomba,  unisadiki.  Tume- 
patana  tuoge  sote.  Vivunje  vyungu  vile.  Tuvivunje  visu 
hivi  ?  Vivunjeni  vyote.  Watunze  watoto  hawa.  Ichu- 
kueni  mizigo  hii.  Chague  mtu  mmoja  apande.  Vipike 
viazi  hivi.  Vikusanye  viazi  vile  nivipike.  Mwambie  aki- 
funike  chungu.  Viharibuni  vibanda  vyote.  Tumeviga- 
wanya  vitu  ulivyotuamuru  tuviharibu.  Tufanye  nini  ? 
Mtumwa  aikokote  miti  mirefu.  Wajakazi  wateke  maji. 
Mfukuza  kipofu.  Kiziwi  akae.  Akutaka  umsayidie.  Ata- 
rudi  awaamue  watu  wabaya.  Uokote  mkuke  alioutupa 
mfalme  aliyelewa  aniue.  Nalijaribu  kumpiga  teke.  Wa- 
liukaribia  mti  waupande.  Nalifuata  niwazuie.  Alivua 
aoge.  Watu  walikimbia  waokoke.  Mfalme  alipeleka 
watumwa  wawili  wanitafute.  Naligeuka  nikifunue  chungu. 
Mwivi  alifika  aupate  mwavuli,  wakalimani  wawili  wangu 
wakarudi  wamzuie.  Sisi  watatu  tulishuka  tukilinde  kibanda, 

THE  KA-  TENSEa 
(page  27) 

Katokeni.  Kamwite.  Kaununue.  Kainunue.  Kawa- 
fukuze.  Akakitwae.  Enenda  kamsayidie.  Nijibu  kaa- 
ngalie.  Alitangulia  akafika.  Alipita  akarudi.  Aliniuliza 
nikamwambia.  Alikuuliza  ukamwambia.  Sikieni  kaniji- 
buni.  Mlitazama,  mkaiona  miti.  Nalikitafuta  kisu  nika- 
kiona.  Watumwa  waliuona  mwavuli  wako  uliouacha  waka- 
xileta,  nikawaambia,  mwenyewe  atarudi,  wakaniambia  huyu 
amjua,  Wageni  walifika  wakauteketeza  mji  wetu.  Mzungu 
aliudaka  mkuke  wangu,  akauvunja,  nikampiga,  akawaambia 


92  SWAHILI    EXERCISES  :     KEY. 

\vatu  waliomfuata,  mueni  yule,  nikakimbia,  nikaokoka, 
Alivaa  viatu  vipya  vyake,  vikamuma.  Nalichoka,  miguu 
yangu  ikavimba.  Mfalme  aliwaita  watu  wake  akawaambia, 
mzee  huyu  mchawi,  mshikeni,  kamfungeni,  wakamfunga. 
Watu  waliomlinda,  wakalewa  wakalala,  nikamfungua  aki- 
kimbia.  Watu  wakaamka,  wakasema,  mchawi  ameokoka. 
Wakamtafuta.  Wakanikuta,  wakaniambia,  wamkumbuka 
mtu  tuliyemmnga.  Nikawaambia,  mtu  yupi?  Wakania- 
mbia, mchawi  yule,  amekimbia,  mfalme  wetu  atatupiga. 
Nikawaambia,  nitawaonyesha  mji  wake,  nifuateni  mtamwona, 
nikatangulia,  wakafuata  wote.  Tukakukuta,  ukatuambia, 
rudini,  mzee  amewadanganya.  Mtoto  alianguka  akalia. 
Alinionyesha  kidonda  chake  nikakiponya.  Naligeuka, 
nikatazama.  Nalikitwaa  kiazi,  nikakionja.  Walilewa  waka- 
gombana.  Aliondoka,  akaimba.  Mlisikitika,  nikafurahi. 
Alingoja  nikapita. 

THE  -KI-   TENSE. 
(page  28) 

Mti  ukianguka.  Mti  ukianguka.  Mti  ukianguka,  Mti 
ukianguka.  Mti  ukianguka,  Nikitazama.  Ukitazama 
utawaona  watu  weusi  wakikimbia.  Mfalme  akifika  tuta- 
mwambia.  Kisu  kikimkata  kidole,  mtoto  atalia.  Akikileta 
kitabu  nitaweza  kusoma.  Akileta  kitabu  ninachokijua. 
Nikikusikia  ukinena  nitakujibu.  Nawasikia  wakikuita. 
Mkifika  mwulizeni.  Mkirudi,  angalieni.  Ukinipiga  anga- 
lia.  Akikuua  nitawaua  watoto  wake  wote.  Mke  wake 
akiniua  atamsamehe.  Ukiwapenda  watoto  wako,  uwapige. 
Ukinipenda  uwasamehe.  Kiziwi  akikusikia  mwambie.  U- 
kimleta  kipofu  tutampiga.  Watafuteni  wevi,  mkiwaona 
\valeteni.  Akiniuliza  umjibu  wewe.  Nikimsikia  akiita  nita- 
rudi.  Nikimwona  akitazama,  nitauficha  mtungi.  Ukiuona 
mbuyu,  umefika.  Nawaona  wapagazi  wakikimbia,  wana- 
acha  mizigo  yao,  wageni  wakiiona  wanaitwaa.  Tukikawia 
tutafanikiwa,  Nikirudi  rudini  ninyi  nyote.  Tukirudi,  tu- 
rudi  sote.  Kibanda  kinaanguka,  tukitoka  tutaokoka.  Aki- 


SWAHILI   EXERCISES  :    KEY.  93 

piga  mbio  nitampita.  Kibanda  kikiharibika,  jenga  chi- 
ngine.  Akifanya  mtumbwi,  uvunjeni.  Akikumbuka  tuta- 
mlipa.  Akileta  mkuke  tutauvunja.  Mpishi  akipika  chakula 
chema  tutamsifu.  Akiharibu  chakula  chema  nitampiga. 
Akiuvunja  mtungi  ataogopa.  Akioga  alizama.  Mzungu 
alimwona  akizama,  akakimbia.  Akiinua  mkono,  kisu  cha- 
lianguka,  kikianguka  kikamkata. 

CONDITIONAL  TENSE. 
(page  29) 

Kama  ningalimsikia,  ningaliogopa.  Kama  kisu  kinga- 
lianguka,  kingalinikata.  Kama  ungalimwambia  mfalme 
angaliwaua.  Ungalikiteketeza  kibanda  chake.  Mngalivite- 
keteza  vibanda  vyao.  Kama  mitumbwi  yao  ingalirudi,  tu- 
ngaliokoka.  Mkuke  ungalimpita.  Mlevi  angaliua  mtoto 
wake.  Kama  angalitazama,  mke  wake  angalimwona.  Kama 
angaliangalia,  mke  wake  angalirudi.  Nalimwona  akipita, 
ukaniambia,  amefanya  mtumbwi.  Nikamwambia,  huyu 
asema  umefanya  mtumbwi  nataka  kuutazama.  Akaniambia, 
kama  ungaliwauliza  watumwa  wangu,  wangalikuonyesha 
mtumbwi  wangu.  Nikamwambia  nionyeshe  mwenyewe. 
Nikauona  nikataajabu.  Kama  mngaliuona  mngalitaajabu. 

NEGATIVE  PRESENT. 
(page  30) 

Mfalme  wetu  hapendi  Wazungu.  Wazungu  hawapendi 
waganga  wetu.  Watumwa  wavivu  hawapendi  msimamizi. 
Mto  hauipiti  mibuyu  ile.  Siwaoni  watu  wetu.  Hamni- 
pendi.  Siwachukii.  Hasomi.  Mitumbwi  haizami.  Huanga- 
lii.  Hawa  wanaandika,  wale  hawaandiki.  Nalimwambia, 
uliyemwona  yupi?  Akaniambia  simwoni.  Hawafundishi 
watoto  wangu.  Mzee  haamki.  Watoto  wao  hawalii.  Mi- 
nazi  yao  haizai.  Mtende  wangu  unazaa,  mitende  yako  haizai. 
Hakipendi  chusa  kile.  Milingote  ile  inaanguka.  Mtumbwi 
wake  hauzami.  Haharibu  kibanda  chako.  Sisahau  vitendo 


94  SWAHILI    EXERCISES  :     KEY. 

vyako.  Hanisamehe.  Hawatujibu.  HumsadikL  Hafikiri- 
Hawakuamuru.  Siwasifu.  Sirudi.  Hatutharau.  HuthanL 
Hatusafiri.  Sitaajabu.  Hawamwabudu  Muungu.  Watu. 
mwa  hawa  si  wavivu. 

NEGATIVE  PAST. 


Sikukubali.  Hatukupatana.  Sikujibu.  Wafalme  hawa- 
kufika.  Wazungu  hawakununua.  Mpishi  hakujenga. 
Hamkununua.  Waanawake  wale  hawakuteka  maji.  Wa- 
zungu sita  hawakulewa.  Mfalme  hakutangulia.  Mzee 
hakukataa.  Mshale  haukumpiga.  Hawakuvileta  vitanda 
viwili.  Wazungu  hawakuikata  minazi.  Wazungu  hawa- 
kuua  viboko  sita.  Mkalimani  hakunionyesha  visiwa. 
Wageni  hawakujenga  vibanda.  Sikuvionja  vitunguu.  Hatu- 
kukitatua  kitambaa.  Sikumwambia  mzee.  Mwashi  huyu 
hakutumia  miti  miingi.  Waoga  hawakumwogopa  mjakazL 
Waashi  hawakutaka  miavuli  miekundu.  Mtumwa  haku- 
mchukia.  Vitabu  havikufika.  Hakujisifu.  Hawakuwaona 
watumwa  weusi  wanne. 

(page  32) 

Mgeni  hajaukata  mkate.  Mlezi  hajawalisha  watoto. 
Hawajavileta  vitanda  viwili.  Sijakiona  chuo.  Hajaufunga 
mkufu  bado.  Wafalme  hawajanilipa  bado.  Hawajawapita 
watoto.  Mtende  haujazaa.  Wazungu  hawajaikata  minazi. 
Mpishi  mvivu  hajakisugua  kifuniko.  Wavuvi  hawajauleta 
mtumbwi  bado. 

NEGATIVE  FUTURE  AND  CONDITIONAL. 

(P*&  32) 

HatarudL  Hatutamwona.  Hatungalimwona.  Kama 
hungalifika,  hangalituona.  Mfalme  wetu  hatawapenda 
Wazungu  wale.  Wazungu  hawangalipenda  waganga  wetu. 
Watumwa  wavivu  hawangalipenda  msimamizi  mkaii.  Ha- 


SWAHILI    EXERCISES  :    KEY.  95 

intawaona  watu  wetu.  Wazungu  hawangalilala.  Watu  weusi 
hawangalikimbia.  Mitumbwi  haingalivunjika.  Minazi  hii 
haingalizaa.  Hawangalikuamuru.  Hatanisamehe.  Ha- 
tutasafiri.  Mzee  hatarudL  Wajinga  wale  hawatatujibu. 
Singalimpenda.  Singalikwambia, 


NEGATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

(*<*&  33) 

Tusione.  Asirudl  Mfalme  asitwambie.  Usitazame. 
Msitazame.  Usimwambie.  Mpige  asifanye.  Usinene, 
wasisikie.  Waambie  wasikitafute.  Tusiupite.  Mshike 
mtoto  asianguke.  Vifiche  vitabu  wasisome.  Waambie  wa- 
sisikilize.  Nitarudi  nisiwakute.  Msivute.  Waambie  wapa- 
gazi  wasiichukue  mizigo  miwili  hii.  Usitwae  mkuke  wangu. 
Usiteketeze  kibanda  changu.  Msimfanye  mfalme.  Usilewe. 
Angalie  kisu  kisikukate  kidole.  Angalie  usimpige  Mzungu 
yule.  Usiwasifu  vijakazi.  Usikilete  kitabu,  sijui  kusoma. 
Usinene  nisikujibu.  Ukimua,  usiwaue  watoto  wake. 

NEGATIVE  WITH  RELATIVES. 
34) 


Kivuli  kisichopita.  Wajakazi  wasiochukua  mitungi.  Mtu 
asiyetupa  mkuke.  Naliona  watu  watatu  usiowaona.  Usiye- 
uona  mkuke  utakipita  kibanda.  Wasiomjua.  Nisiyemjua. 
Miti  isiyoanguka  haikuseta  kibanda  chako.  Kiti  kisicho- 
vunjika.  Wajinga  wasiokimbia.  Mzungu  asiyeuvuka  mto. 
Wazungu  wasiouvuka  mto.  Watumishi  wasiopenda  viazi. 
Mti  usiozaa.  Wagonjwa  wasiotaajabu.  Mganga  asiyewa- 
ponya  wote.  Wajinga  wasiomlipa  mchawi  asiyewadanganya. 
Mfalme  asiyempenda  mke  wake.  Mfalme  asiyewapenda 
watoto  wake.  Mpishi  asiyepika  chakula  changu.  Chakula 
chema  kisichotuua. 


96  SWAHILI   EXERCISES  :    KEY. 

NEGATIVE  PARTICIPIAL  TENSE, 
35) 


Asipokupenda  sitampenda.  Wasipotoka  wafalme  hawa- 
taingia.  Asipokaribu  mwenyewe  mleteni.  Nisipongoja 
sitapata  kisu  chake.  Mfupa  usipovunjika,  mkono  utapona. 
Mzungu  asipomua  mpishi,  hatawapendeza  watu  weusi.  Usi- 
pompiga  mtoto  wako,  atakutharau.  ' 

THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 

35) 


Nalipigwa,  hukupigwa.  Atapigwa  na  mtumwa.  Wapigwe. 
Nisipigwe.  Mzee  ataumwa.  Mkuke  uliletwa.  Vibanda 
viwili  vinajengwa.  Mfalme  hajazikwa.  Vijakazi  wanaitwa. 
Mtumbwi  utunzwe.  Wazungu  hawatashindwa.  Chakula 
kimepikwa.  Mji  umeingiwa  na  wageni  wanne.  Mlango 
ungalifungwa.  Siogopwi.  Watoto  hawajalishwa  bado.  Sikui- 
ficha  mikuke,  imefichwa  na  wenyewe.  Kama  ningalimw- 
ambia  singalipendwa  na  Wazungu.  Kipande  kimewekwa 
wapi?  Mchawi  hapendezwi.  Hutakumbukwa.  Mfalme 
wako  hatakumbukwa  na  watoto  wetu.  Kioo  hakija- 
rudishwa.  Kibanda  kifagiwe  na  mjakazi.  Watoto  wasi- 
fundishwe  na  Mzungu.  Naliambiwa  na  mtumwa  wake. 
Mkuke  ulitupwa  na  mwivi. 

ADVERBS. 

(page  37) 

Nimenunua  mkuke  mzuri  sana.  Haoni  vema.  Siwa- 
pendi  sana  watumwa  wavivu.  Nalimwona  akirudi  upesi. 
Singalijenga  kibanda  kikubwa  sana,  Nalitazama  nyuma 
nikaona  wageni  wawili.  Nalisikia  mtu  karibu,  akiimba  sana, 
nikathani  huyu  Mzungu  nitakimbia  upesi.  Mfalme  juu,  wa- 
tumwa chini.  Niliona  mtu  akitazama,  nikakwambia,  ana- 
sasa,  ukaniambia,  anatazama  nje,  sisi  ndani,  tijpite 


SWAHILI   EXERCISES:    KEY.  97 

poleple  oasitusikie,  yamkini  tutaokoka,  tukapita,  halafu  aka- 
toka  mtu  mwingine,  nikasema,  kweli  hatuwezi  kuokoka, 
ukasema,  mtumwa  tu,  hawezi  kutuzuia,  tukampita.  Nime- 
wakumbuka  marra  nyingi  watu  wawili  wale,  wangalituua 
marra  wote  kama  wangalitujua.  Wato'.o  walitangulia  mbele, 
waana  waume  wakawafuata  watoto,  mwisho  wakafuata  wazee. 

PREPOSITIONS. 


Kilifanywa  cha  miti.  Naona  mtu  akisimama  juu  ya 
mtumbwi.  Akakipokea  kwa  mikono  miwili.  Naliununua 
mkuke  kwa  kitambaa  kikukuu.  Atarudi  katika  mji.  Nali- 
mkuta  katika  mji.  Rudini  kwa  mfalme  wenu.  Alikaa  katika 
mti.  Akashuka  katika  mti,  akapita  hatta  akawakuta  wajoli 
wawili  wake  juu  ya  mti  mwingine.  Wakafika  chini  ya 
kilima,  Watumwa  wote  walifuata  nyuma  ya  mfalme.  Aka- 
tangulia  na  watumwa  wake  katika  kisiwa.  Nalirudi  kwa 
wenzi  wangu  tukamwona  mwenyewe  katika  mtumbwi  wake, 
tukamwambia,  shuka  katika  mtumbwi  wako,  akajibu,  vema, 
tukamfuate  upesi  mfalme  wetu,  tutamwona  katika  mji. 
Nikamwambia,  hajafika  katika  mji  wake,  akatuambia,  ana- 
fika  sasa. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 


Kijana  na  mzee  walinifuata  katika  mji.  Mzee  akasimama 
katika  mlango  na  mkuke,  nikamwambia,  Umefika  lini  ? 
Umeupata  wapi  mkuke  ule?  Wala  hakunijibu,  nikamwu- 
liza  tena.  Marra  nikamwona  kijana  tena,  nami,  nikamwu- 
liza,  mzee  huyu  ameupata  wapi  mkuke  ule  ?  Akaniambia, 
Mwulize  mwenyewe.  Nikamwambia,  Nimemwuliza,  lakini 
hanijibu.  Akaniambia,  Labuda  hakukusikia,  sema  sana. 
Nikasema  sana,  mzee  akasema,  Mimi  kiziwi,  nakusikia  ukise- 
ma  tu,  nisamehe.  Nikamwambia,  Nawe  nisamehe  sikujua. 
Nikamwuliza  tena  nikisema  sana,  akaniambia,  Naliununua. 
Nikamwambia,  Lini?  Kijana  akaniambia,  Ao  aliuiba  ao 


98  SWAHILI   EXERCISES:    KEY. 

aliuokota  katika  milima.  Mzee  akamwambia,  Waseraa  nini  ? 
Kijana  akasema,  Alikusikia,  naye  kama  kweli  angaliununua 
angalikujibu  marra.  Nikamwambia,  Huyu  mzee  yamkini 
amesahau.  Akaniambia,  Hasahau,  lakini  watu  wa  mji  huu 
twamjua  sana  mwivi  huyu  tangu  mtoto.  Nikamwambia, 
Ameiba  nini  ?  Akaniambia,  Vitu  vingi,  huyu  mgeni  alifu- 
kuzwa  na  mfalme  wake  katika  mji  wake  hatta  sasa  anakaa 
katika  mji  wetu,  wala  hatumpendi  lakini  hatumfukuzi  kwa 
sababu  mchawi,  nao  watu  wamwogopa.  Nikataajabu  niki- 
msikia,  nikasema,  Sisadiki  kama  huyu  mchawi  ninyi  nyote 
waoga,  nanyi  mnaogopa  kivuli.  Akaniambia,  Simwogopi 
kwani  nathani  waganga  wetu  waweza  kumshinda.  Nikam- 
wambia mzee,  Umetusikia?  Akaniambia,  Mimi  kiziwi  na- 
wasikia  mkisema  tu,  lakini  usimsadiki  akikwambia  nimefii- 
kuzwa  na  mfalme  wetu  katika  mji  wangu.  Sikufukuzwa, 
nami  nitarudl  Kama  ningalifukuzwa  watu  wa  mji  huu 
hawangalinikubali  nikae  katika  mji  wao.  Nikamwambia,  Ao 
wewe  si  kiziwi,  ao  yakini  amesema  kweli  wewe  mchawi. 
Akaniambia  mzee,  Sisikii.  Nikageuka  nikatoka  katika  mji 
wala  sikumwambia  mtu  ilia  wewe,  lakini  namsadiki  mzee 
wala  kiziwi,  wala  mchawi,  ilia  mtu  mwerevu  aliyeuiba  mkuke, 
akataka  kunidanganya,  lakini  nami  najua  kuwadanganya 
watu, 

PLACE. 
(page  41) 

Nalipaona  mahali  waliposimama  wavuvi,  mtumbwi  mpya 
wao  ukizama,  Nalipapita  mahali  penyewe.  Naliona  mahali 
penyi  vibanda  vyingi.  Sulemani  alifika  mahali  pako,  nika- 
mwuliza,  umemwacha  Abdallah  wapi  ?  niambie  mahali,  akani- 
ambia  mahali  katika  mji  walipokaa  wazee  wake  zamani. 
Nikamwambia  sipajui.  Akaniambia,  ulipomwona  ukiuvuka 
mto.  Nikapakumbuka  mahali,  pazuri,  karibu  ya  mto. 
Nikamwambia,  Napakumbuka  sasa,  tulipaona  sole,  mahah' 
pazuri.  Akaniambia,  Pazuri. 


swAHiu  EXERCISES:  KEY,  99 

INFINITIVES  OF  VERBS. 
(page  42) 

Kukubali.  Kushtaki.  Kupatana.  Kubadili.  Sipendi 
kukupiga.  Kujibu  marra  nyingi.  Kuzaa  kwingi.  Kuona 
na  kusadiki.  Kujisifu  si  kwema.  Kuchemka  upesi.  Ku- 
leta  si  kutwaa.  Kupika  kwake  kuzuri.  Kulia  kutakuthuru. 
Kwa  kuliraa.  Katika  kucheza.  Kwa  kuchimba  sana.  Kwa 
kuota  kuzuri  na  kufanya  kubaya.  Mtumwa  mvivu  anisu- 
mbua  sana  kwa  kukawia  kwake.  Waliileta  miti  kwa  kuko- 
kota.  Aliokoka  kwa  .sababu  ya  kuogopa.  Naliwaona  katika 
kupigana,  Kusamehe  na  kusahau. 


ADJECTIVES   [MA-  CLASS]. 
(page  44) 

Jambo  baya.  Mapenzi  makubwa.  Malozi  mabivu. 
Jibu  kali.  Tao  pana.  Majifu  makavu.  Shoka  zito.  Ma- 
ganda  manene.  Pipa  dogo.  Bakuli  zima.  Matuta  marefu. 
Malengelenge  makubwa.  Majipu  mapya.  Machupa  ma- 
tupu.  Kasha  zito.  Dafu  tamu.  Tone  kubwa.  Masikio 
marefu.  Mayayi  mabovu.  Makosa  mapya.  Mainzi  ma 
kali.  Matunda  matamu.  Kaburi  tupu.  Tunda  dogo. 
Maneno  mazuri.  Jani  refu.  Majani  mafupi.  Jamvi  pana. 
Maziwa  mabichi.  Jina  zuri.  Shingo  refu.  Makasia  mazito. 
Machungwa  matamu.  Manukato  mazurl  Shamba  kubwa. 
Mashairi  mazuri 

Gote  jororo.  Tundu  jembamba.  Kaburi  jingine.  Ma- 
kaburi  mengi.  Maji  mengi.  Tunda  jekundu.  Matunda 
mekundu  marefu.  Mainzi  membamba.  Makosa  mengine. 
Macho  meusl  Macho  meupe.  Jicho  jekundu.  Yayi 
jeupe.  Mavumbi  mepesi.  Mashaka  mengi.  Dau  dogo 
jembamba.  Matumaini  mema.  Machupa  mekundu  mema, 
Bakuli  jepesi.  Shoka  jema.  Mashoka  mepesi  mema,  M»- 
jibu  merevu.  Malozi  mema.  Mambo  mepesi. 


100  SWAHILI   EXERCISES  :    KEY. 

DEMONSTRATIVES   [MA-  CLASS], 
(page  44) 

Kasha  kubwa  hili.  Masufuria  makubwa  yale.  Matango 
haya.  Masikio  marefu  yale.  Kosa  dogo  hili.  Tundu  lile. 
Magote  haya.  Matone  mepesi  haya.  Mashaka  machungu 
yale.  Jicho  kupwa  hili.  Meno  makubwa  haya.  Yayi  bichi 
kubwa  hili.  Yayi  bichi  lile.  Machupa  yale.  Maagizo 
haya.  Majipu  haya.  Mapipa  makubwa  manne  yale.  Ma- 
jifu  makavu  haya.  Matao  matano  haya.  Jibu  lile.  Malozi 
raeupe  haya.  Shauri  jerna  hili.  Mambo  mapya  haya. 
Maji  matamu  yale.  Mashoka  makali  haya.  Shoka  kali 
lile.  Pipa  lile.  Pipa  hill 

WHICH?  [MA-  CLASS]. 
(page  45) 

Machupa  yapi  ?  Kasha  lipi  ?  Sikio  lipi  ?  Mayayi  yapi  ? 
Jicho  lipi?  Matunda  yapi?  Tundu  lipi?  Shimo  lipo? 
Gote  lipi  ?  Mapipa  yapi  ?  Shoka  lipi  ?  Makasia  yapi  ? 
Fungu  lipi?  Maji  yapi?  Mafuta  yapi?  Tao  lipi?  Jino 
lipi? 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS   [MA-  CLASS} 
45) 


Nimelikubali  shauri.  Mambo  haya  hayapatani.  Huta- 
yabadili  maagano.  Majifu  yanisumbua.  Makanda  yame- 
fika.  Maji  yanachemka.  Amelivunja  bakuli.  Leteni  ma- 
pipa  sita.  Aliyelijenga  kaburi  nani?  Tulivunje  shoka. 
Nunua  mayayi  kumi.  Usiyavunje  mayayl  Walitunze  tawa. 
Waanawake  watachukua  maji  katika  mitungi.  Napenda 
kulitafuna  ganda  tamu  hili.  Hawakulisafisha  jamvi.  Twa- 
liyakusanya  machungwa.  Mpishi  wetu  atayapika  mananasi. 
Lifunike  sufuria.  Wameyaseta  malozi.  Tulikate  lengelenge? 
Maziwa  yanapungua.  Watumwa  walijaribu  kulilinda  zizL 


SWAHILI   EXERCISES  :    KEY.  IOI 

Tuyagawanye  mapapayi  ao  makorosho  ?  Waliyamwaga  ma- 
futa.  Mfalme  hakuliingia  shimo.  Utayaona  maboga  mawili 
katika  mlango.  Walisahau  kuyaleta  makasia,  wakaleta  ma- 
kafi  mawili  tu.  Kama  wangalilitweka  tanga,  wangaliokoka. 
Kama  hawangalilitweka  tanga  kubwa  hawangalizama.  Tu- 
nayatafuta  matikiti,  umeyaona  ? 

POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS  AND  CASE  [MA-  CLASS] 
(page  46) 

Nalitwaa  shoka  la  Mzungu.  Nitaliona  shamba  la  mfalme. 
Utamuma  mzee  jicho.  Nimeliona  kafi  la  mlevi.  Tumeli- 
pita  kaburi  la  Mzungu.  Naona  majifu  meupe  ya  moto 
mkubwa.  Wanayateketeza  mananasi  ya  kiziwi.  Watumwa 
wa  mfalme  walitwaa  makafi  ya  mvuvi.  Gote  la  mtumwa 
lilimpiga  mgeni  jicho.  Wamelificha  tanga  la  mtumbwi 
Shingo  la  mzee.  Majuto  ya  mgeni.  Tumbo  la  mtumwa 
mvivu.  Maagano  ya  wapagazi.  Sufuria  la  mpishi.  Ma 
penzi  ya  mlezi.  Meno  ya  watoto.  Mashauri  ya  kipofu. 
Sikio  la  mchiro.  Mchiro  amemuma  mtoto  kwapa.  Jibu  la 
Mzungu. 

Mfalme  wetu  ameharibu  shamba  lako.  Wazungu  wame- 
kata  makuti  yao.  Tunda  langu  bivu.  Shoka  lake  kali. 
Mshale  wake  ulinipiga  shingo.  Walipenda  machungwa  yao. 
Tao  letu  limeanguka.  Vijakazi  vyako  vyalitwaa  tawa  langu. 
Mamumunye  yako  yanipendeza.  Mzee  ataka  talasimu  langu. 
Jino  langu  linaniuma.  Shoka  langu  linaugusa  mti.  Naona 
tundu  lake.  Nalichukua  machungwa  yake.  Jipu  lako  ku- 
bwa. Utatwaa  manukato  yetu.  Nitaacha  gari  lako.  Ma- 
zungumzo  yao  yamenipendeza.  Mtachukia  mainzi  yetu. 
Watu  wetu  wapenda  mapapayi.  Ameficha  maziwa  yangu. 
Mashairi  yako  mengi.  Maziwa  yetu,  maji  yenu  na  mafuta 
yao.  Machukio  yangu,  mapenzi  yako  na  majuto  yao.  Maa- 
gano yetu  hayajaisha.  Lengelenge  langu  si  jipu  lako. 

Mambo  yote.  Mazungumzo  yote.  Jibu  lenyewe.  Ma- 
pipa  yenyewe.  Mapipa  yenyi  maji.  Pipa  lenyi  mafuta. 
Tula  lenyi  viazl  Majipu  yote  yaniuma,  Lete  mabakuli 


102  SWAHILI   EXERCISES  :    KEY. 

yote.     Sikio  lenyewe.     Vunje  majani  yote  kalete  matunda 
yote,     Maneno  yenyi  makosa. 

THE   RELATIVE   [MA-  CLASS]. 
(page  47) 

Machitkio  ninayoyaona.  Mashauri  niliyoyapokea.  Mambo 
yaliyonisumbua.  Maagano  tuliyoyafanya,  wewe  na  mimi. 
Malozi  yaliyookotwa.  Jibu  atakalolitia.  Tao  linaloanguka. 
Majifu  anayoyatawanya.  Shoka  litakaloukata  mti  ule. 
Mapipa  waliyoyachukua  watu  wa  mfalme.  Bakuli 
nililolivunja.  Lengelenge  lililoniuma.  Jipu  lililoonekana. 
Gari  wanalolivuta.  Kanisa  tunalolijenga  katika  mji.  Ma- 
tumaini  watakayoyaona  watumwa.  Mainzi  yanayonisumbua. 
Mafuta  unayoyamimina.  Shimo  ulilolichimba.  Manukato 
uliyoyanunua.  Mananasi  yanayopikwa.  Matikiti  wanayo- 
yatafuta  watoto.  Tanga  walilolitweka, 

NEGATIVE  TENSES  [MA  CLASS]. 
(page  48) 

Mfalme  wetu  hayapendi  malozi  haya.  Mambo  haya  ha- 
yanisumbuL  Shoka  hili  halikati.  Mazungumzo  haya  ha- 
yanipendezi.  Jibu  lake  halitoshi.  Pipa  halizami.  Jicho 
halisikii.  Sikio  halioni.  Maboga  hayaruki.  Mamumunye 
liayalii. 

Bakuli  halikufika.  Shoka  halikuniuma.  Talasimu  hali- 
kumthuru.  Matalasimu  yao  hayakuwalinda.  Ganda  chu- 
ngu  halikukuponya. 

Jambo  halijaisha.  Ganda  chungu  halijakuponya  bado. 
Tone  halijaanguka.  Mayayi  hayajapikwa.  Maji  hayaja- 
chemka  bado.  Jani  halijakauka. 

Jibu  kali  halitamfukuza.  Mananasi  hayataoza.  Mashairi 
haya  hayatampendeza  sana.  Mashairi  yako  hayatampendeza 
mfalme.  Maneno  magumu  hayatatuua.  Majuto  hayatani- 
lipa,  Matanga  tiayataugusa  mlingote. 


SWAHILI   EXERCISES  :    KEY. 


Mayayi  yasioze.  Machungwa  yasianguke.  Maboga  yasi- 
pikwe.  Matunda  yisisetwe.  Majifu  yasitunzwe.  Mayayi 
yasianguke. 


ADJECTIVES   [N-   CLASS]. 
(page  52) 

Hasara  kubwa  nyingi.  Embe  tnbivu  mbili.  Alama  nye- 
usi.  Fetha  nyeupe.  Imbu  moja.  Sindano  kali.  Habari 
njema.  Pua  ndefu.  .Barua  nane.  Lulu  nzuri.  Kalamu 
njema.  Nguzo  nene.  Ncha  kali.  Thamani  kubwa.  Robo 
tatu.  Haja  mpya.  Dari  njema.  Nafasi  nyingi.  Nafasi 
nyingi.  Kutu  nyekundu.  Parafujo  ndefu.  Akili  cbache. 
Dalili  wazi.  Ngozi  kubwa.  Sabuni  nyororo.  Nyota  ndogo. 
Hali  mbaya.  Fimbo  ndefu.  Meza  pana.  Hema  nyeupe. 
Hila  nyerevu.  Njia  fupi.  Ngano  mbivu.  Dawati  nzuri. 
Nanga  nzito.  Pembe  tatu.  Nyama  mbichi.  Nguvu  nyingi. 
Ndizi  tamu.  Ndevu  ndefu.  Damu  nyeusi.  Ndoo  ndogo. 
Zulia  kubwa.  Sifa  njema.  Rungu  nzito.  Rangi  nyeupe. 
Thiraa  sita.  Siku  kumi.  Sitaha  nyembamba,  Ndoto 
nyingi.  Bandera  mpya.  Bustani  nzuri. 


PRONOUNS  [NA-  CLASS], 
(page  52) 

Hesabu  zanisumbua.  Fayida  yanipendeza.  Walizipokea 
sadaka.  Nanga  i  nzito.  Aliipiga  pembe.  Nyama  zime- 
kimbia.  Anazitafuta  nyama.  Siafu  ziraetuuma.  Mchwa 
zimeziharibu  daftari.  Boriti  zi  ndefu.  Nimeisikia  kengele. 
Watu  wanne  wanaichukua  jeneza.  Damu  itanikumbusha. 
Naliziona  ndoo  tupu  mbili.  Naliivaa  kofia,  ikaniuma.  Saa 
ikapiga.  Nguo  zataka  kufungwa.  Nalizinunua  garofuu. 
Ndoto  ikaisha.  Njaa  inaniuma.  Wataitweka  bandera, 
Bandera  imetwekwa,  Sikuipata  fayida.  Nimeipata  hasara. 
Twaisikia  sauti. 


104  SWAHILI    EXERCISES  :    KEY. 

DEMONSTRATIVES  [N-  CLASS]. 


Nyumba  hii  kubwa.  Bustani  hii  ndogo.  Ajabu  kubwa 
hii.  Kabari  nzito  mbili  hizi.  Siki  kali  hii.  Ishara  ile. 
Ishara  zipi?  Ngozi  kavu  zile.  Lulu  nzuri  zile.  Embe 
tamu  hizi.  Fetha  mpya  hii.  Stndano  zipi?  Haja  hii. 
Taa  hizi.  Taa  zipi  ?  Hizi.  Baruti  hii.  Hema  zile. 
Inchi  hii.  Ndoo  ipi?  Zulia  hii.  Kofia  zile.  Nyumba 
zile.  Saa  hii.  Nguo  hizL 

POSSESSIVES  [N-  CLASS] 
(page  54) 

Nimeona  hesabu  zake.  Nionyeshe  daftari  yako.  Fayida 
za  Abdallah  zapita  zangu.  Nimenunua  ndizi  zake  zote. 
Boriti  za  nyumba  yangu.  Alimkata  mzee  ndevu.  Watoto 
wanazipiga  kengele  mbili  zetu.  Alishusha  ndoo  yetu  katika 
kisima  chako.  Mkuke  wa  Abdallah  uliipiga  ngao  ya  Ali. 
Shughuli  zetu  nyingi.  Mabruki  amevaa  kofia  nyekundu 
yangu.  Saa  yangu  njema,  yake  mbaya.  Nguo  yake  imeta- 
tuka.  Tende  zile  zangu.  Ndoto  njema  zetu.  Tupa  zenu. 
Taa  zenu  zinawaka.  Sikukubali  thahabu  yake.  Sijaona 
njugu  zako.  Hatuabudu  sanamu  zao.  Waliona  hema 
zenu.  Sisikii  sauti  zao.  Hawatapata  haja  yao.  Hatania- 
mbia  siri  zake.  Fanya  kazi  yako.  Mganga  hajui  kuwa- 
ponya  jeraha. 

Nachukia  zawadi  zote.  Zawadi  zote  zampendeza  mfalme 
wetu.  Bustani  yenyi  miti.  Hema  zenyi  bandera.  Ndizi 
zote  zimeoza,  Siagi  yote  imeyeyuka. 

THE  RELATIVE  [N-  CLASS]. 
(page  54) 

Jeraha  niliyoiponya.  Jeraha  nisizoziponya.  Nyota 
iliyofuata,  Uliiona  kazi  waliyoifanya.  Ngano  itakayosagwa, 


SWAHILI   EXERCISES  :    KEY.  105 

Kabari  mtu  wetu  aliyoitia  chini  ya  mlango  ililegezwa.  Siki 
isiyooza  ilimwagwa.  Handaki  aliyoichimba  katika  sham- 
ba  lake  ilifika  hatta  nyumba  uliyoinunua  Naliziona 
dalili  nilizoambiwa  niziangalie.  Haya  yake  imemwacha. 
Zitafute  parafujo  tulizoziona  jana.  Kutu  inayoonekana  leo, 
ilionekana  jana.  Haja  zote  atakazonyima  mfalme  leo  nita- 
zisikia  halafu.  Nafasi  niliyoitaka  ingalikutosha.  Mvua 
iliyopita  juu  ya  dari  yetu  iliingia  katika  nyumba  mpya  wana- 
yoijenga.  Ahadi  niliyoitoa.  Mfalme  aliijua  hila  iliyowa- 
danganya  wageni.  Fetha  aliyoipokea  mvuvi  nyingi.  Nitatoa 
robo  pa'  thamani  anayoitaica  mwashi.  Nguzo  zilizosetwa 
zote  kubwa.  Lulu  aliyoileta  mvuvi  hatukuiona  kabisa, 

NEGATIVE  TENSES  [N-  CLASS]. 

(P*8*  55) 

Fetha  yote  haingalitumiwa.  Hesabu  zake  hazikunipe- 
ndeza.  Fayida  hii  haitakutosha.  Hewa  hii  haitakuponya. 
Sadaka  zao  hazingalimpendeza  Muungu.  Hasira  ya  mfalme 
hainithuru.  Sauti  ya  kengele  haikunisumbua.  Boriti  hazi- 
kuoza.  Galawa  haijazama.  Saa  haipigi.  Saa  hazijapiga. 
Barua  haifiki.  Barua  zenu  hazikufika.  Parafujo  haiingii. 
Pua  haoni. 

ADJECTIVES  [U-  CLASS]. 
(page  57) 

Uzee  mwingi.  Ndevu  ndefu.  Udevu  mrefu.  Uznri 
mwingi.  Upindi  mrefu.  Pindi  ndefu.  Fagio  ndogo.  Kucha 
fupL  Ukucha  mrefu.  Ua  mpana.  Umande  mwingi.  Uso 
mzuri.  Nyuso  nzuri.  Ukuni  mdogo.  Kuni  kavu.  Unga 
mweupe.  Unga  mwororo.  Nyayo  nyingi.  Nyele  nyekundu. 
Unyele  mweupe.  Unyele  mnene.  Wino  mweusi.  Funguo 
ndogo.  Utambi  mnene.  Mbau  nene.  Ubau  mwepesi. 
Pondo  nzito.  Mbau  nyekundu  mbili.  Nataka  pondo  nde- 
fu mbili.  Nimenunua  mbau  njema  tano.  Nalisikia  nyimbo 
tatu,  Naliona  unga  mwingi.  Nalikaa  usiku  mmoja. 


io6  SWAHILI  EXERCISES:  KEY. 

PRONOUNS  [U-  CLASS], 

(page  58) 

Upindi  umevunjika.  Uma  wauma.  Ufalme  umefanlki- 
wa.  Naliumwaga  wino.  Umeme  ulipiga  mti  ukaua  watii 
watatu.  Ukarasa  uliletvva,  ukatatuka.  Ubau  haukutakwa 
wenyi  urefu  mwingi.  Mtoto  alikata  kuni  akajiuma  uso. 
Waliziona  tambi  nazo  fupi  sana.  Ufalme  ulishindwa.  Nya- 
yo  hazionekani.  Ukali  wa  mfalme  wawasumbua  watu  wake. 
Mtoto  alizitwaa  funguo  akazisugua.  Ubishi  uliwapendeza. 
Ukufi  wa  unga  utatosha.  Ulimwengu  u  mbaya.  Urithi 
huu  si  mkubwa.  Nalishika  upanga  wako.  Aliokotawembe 
wangu  akauleta.  Ua  ulifagiwa.  Ufagio  ulipotea,  Nyavu 
zilivunjika  zikaokoka  nyama.  Uvivu  wa  mtoto  wanitoshea. 
Wembe  huu  mkali.  Ubau  huu  mfupi.  Ufalme  mkubwa 
huu.  Nyimbo  hizi.  Wall  ule.  Fagio  zile.  Pindi  zipi? 
Ua  mpana  ule.  Funguo  zile  zilipotea.  Wamezivunja 
pondo  zile  zote.  Uso  mzuri  ule.  Unga  mbaya  huu.  Uayo 
huu.  Upanga  mkali  ule. 

Upuuzi  unaousema.  Panga  zile  nilizozinunua.  Alizinu- 
nua  nyuma  zile  nilizozikataa.  Zilianguka  kuta  nilizozijenga. 
Usiku  wote  watu  walicheza  wakafanya  sauti  nyingi.  Nime- 
ziokota  funguo  alizozisugua  mtoto.  Aliomba  ukufi  wa 
tende  nikakataa.  Sikupenda  unyonge  wake  walipomtaka 
kutoa  wali  alioupika.  Hawangaliuleta  unga  nilioutaka. 

THE   -NI   CASE. 
(page  60) 

Mtu  aliingia  mtoni.  Wakafuata  nyumbani  mwakc.  Wa- 
liona  miti  mingi  bustanini.  Alinisukuma  hatta  tukafika 
nyumbani  kwetu.  Waujua  mt?nde  mlangoni  pangu  ?  Alilala 
na  chuo  chake  kwapani.  Sijarudi  mjini  kwangu.  Nitangoja 
chini  ya  mti  njiani.  Alitoka  kisimani  akafika  mjini.  Alishi- 
ka  upindi  wake  na  mishale  yake  mkononi.  Wakakimbia 
wakajificha  nyurabani  mvvao.  Walipofika  mtoni  watu  njiani 


SWAHILI   EXERCISES  :    K.EX.  107 

wakacheka,  punda  akaogopa,  akapiga  teke,  akaanguka  mtoni, 
akazama,  ratu  na  kijana  wakarudi  nyumbani  kwao. 


(page  61) 

Wewe  thaifu.  Nyumba  yake  safi.  Mayayi  yale  rahisi. 
Watumwa  wake  amini.  Killa  mtu  alichukua  upanga.  Vi- 
tabu  ghali.  Mti  ulioununua  laini.  Watoto  hawa  rathi  na 
chakula  chema  chao.  Watu  wale  si  watumwa,  wale  hum. 
Makasha  wanayoyafanya  tayari.  Pondo  zao  kamili.  Misiba 
yako  hafifu.  Kazi  yangu  thaifu.  Kazi  yako  bora.  Walipe- 
leka  chokaa  haba.  Kanisa  wanalolijenga  imara.  Kuua  si 
halali.  Mtu  hodari  yule  anayepigana  atamshinda  thaifu. 
Ndizi  bustanini  mwao  marithawa.  Chakula  wanachokikataa 
yabis.  Watu  wale  wote  raasikini.  Nalimwona  utupu. 

COMPOUND    ADJECTIVES. 
(page  62) 

Vitabu  hivi  vya  kale.  Hajui  dasturi  za  kiungwana. 
Baada  ya  wakati  wa  mvua  pepo  za  baridi  zaanza.  Watu  wa 
hila  wadanganywa  marra  nyingi.  Kazi  haba  yafanywa  siku 
za  giza.  Mambo  mabaya  sana  si  ya  milele.  Nguo  ya  kizu- 
ngu  i  ghali.  Waliteketeza  mji  wa  kwanza  walioushinda. 
Mtu  wa  heri  amenunua  nyumba  ya  kupendeza.  Alimwaga 
kahawa  ya  moto.  Mtu  wa  haki  apendwa  na  mtumwa  wake. 
Dasturi  yetu  kupita  upande  wa  kushoto  wa  njia.  Mtu  wa 
akili  alikataa  kukaa  katika  nyumba  ya  pili.  Walipika  ugali 
wake  katika  chungu  cha  mwenyewe.  Usivae  nguo  za  watu. 
Ukuta  wa  mkono  wa  kuume  wa  nyumba  ulianguka.  Alije- 
nga  mwenyewe  kibanda  cha  mviringo.  Sultani  anayafikiri 
mambo  ya  siri  ya  ufalme  wake.  Mfalme  wa  kishenzi  aliki- 
haribu  kitabu  cha  thamani.  Mwite  mtu  wa  pili.  Kata  killa 
mti  wa  nne.  Nyumba  ya  kenda  ilianguka.  Nitakulipa  killa 
siku  ya  kumi. 


tO&  SV/AHILI    EXERCISES  :    KEY. 

ADJECTIVAL  VERBS. 
(page  63) 

Sauti  ya  mtu  imesikiliana.  Watoto  walipofuka.  Mayayi 
yaliyotokoseka.  Mitungi  iliyovunjika.  Funguo  za  watoto 
zimekatuka.  Mwezi  umeng'ara.  Mguu  wa  mtoto  umechu- 
buka.  Goie  iimefaganzi.  Mlango  umenakishiwa.  Chakula 
kilirahisika.  Mliko  haitatakasika.  Mbingu  zimetakata. 
Maneno  yako  yameelea.  Roho  yako  imefarajika.  Umete- 
ngenea  sana.  Upindi  umepindana.  Ametumaini,  Ume- 
fathaika.  Kamba  imepotoka.  Mtoto  amepona.  Chumba 
kimechafuka.  Njia  imekauka.  Chakula  kimetosha.  Wa- 
tumwa  walichoka.  Kazi  yetu  imesitawi.  Msimamizi  ame- 
levuka.  Miti  imevia.  Uzi  umetatana.  Kisibau  chake 
kimekazana.  Abdallah  amesumbuka.  Kanda  limefumuka. 
Amefaa.  Maagano  5rametanguka.  Kijana  amethoofika. 
Majaliwa  amechoka  na  kazi.  Mzee  amekunjana.  Uso  uli- 
okunjana.  Lulu  imenifaa.  Mti  uliovia.  Sisikitiki  kabisa. 
Kijakazi  aliyenyamaza.  Mtoto  aliyeungua  aogopa  moto. 
Ulimwengu  umeviringana.  Kasha  lililoviringa.  Njia  iliyo- 
paruza.  Kijana  aliyetulia.  Nyama  iliyooza.  Mwamba  uli- 
ochongoka.  Msimamizi  aliyependeza.  Hesabu  imekamilika. 
Mzee  aliyepooza.  Dau  limeelekea  kwetu.  Ua  limefunuka. 
Njaa  yangu  imezidi.  Mkate  uliofanya  ukungu.  Njaa  yangu 
imepunguka.  Watumwa  waliolewa.  Wazungu  walionenye- 
kea.  Mzigo  umemlemea  mpagazi.  Ndizi  zimekomaa. 
Mgeni  anapumbazika. 

RELATIVE  WITHOUT  NOTE  OF  TIME, 
(page  64) 

Mtu  umpendaye  amerudi.  Mfalme  umogopaye  amepona. 
Jam  bo  likuzuialo  lanisayidia  mimi.  Moto  uwakao  nyumbani 
mwangu  utapika  nyama  uiletayo.  Utapata  chakula  chote 
nikipikacho  katika  sufuria  lako.  Vitabu  uvisomavyo  havita- 
kufaa.  Utaona  fayida  uitafutayo.  Mlango  niufunguao  sita- 
ufunga. 


SWAHILI   EXERCISES  :    KEY.  1 09 

NAMES    OF  ANIMALS. 
(page  66) 

Naliwaambia  asikari  wakamwita  jemadari.  Habeshia 
mrefu  alimwambia  wakili  mkali.  Tembo  mkubwa  aliumwa 
na  siafu.  Mchwa  adui  wetu.  Nyani  wakubwa  wakaa  mitini. 
Punda  mweupe  wa  kinyozi  alimpiga  teke  shangazi  wangu. 
Nyuki  wafanya  asali.  Vijana  waliona  ngamia,  ndugu  wao 
aliona  ndege  wazuri  wawili.  Sermala  aliumwa  na  taandu. 
Nalimwona  jumbe  alinunua  ng'ombe  wengi,  na  jogoo,  na 
kuku  wengi,  na  mabata  wakubwa.  Naliona  mbwa,  aliumwa 
na  mainzi.  Marafiki  wangu  hawapendi  mende.  Kijakazi 
amenunua  paa  mzuri.  Baba  wangu  alinunua  matunda  mengi, 
kibeti  adui  wake  akayatwaa.  Bibi  aliogopa  vyura  wakubwa ; 
bwana  akasema,  simba  mkubwa  na  chui  mkali  waogopwa, 
lakini  watu  wa  akili  hawaogopi  chura.  Jini  alifanya  uchawi 
juu  ya  ];v;ali,  mama  wake  alitaka  kuua  nguruwe  mkubwa  na 
njiwa  watatu;  kasisi  akamwambia,  haya  upuuzi.  Baharia 
akioga,  naliona  papa,  alikuja  akamshika  kwa  meno  yake. 
Nalinunua  kondoo  walionona  wanane.  Nyoka  mwerevu 
alimtwaa  ghafula  sungura.  Dobi  alinunua  punda,  asikari 
wakampata,  hatta  wakimchukua,  nge  alimuma  mguu.  Kathi 
mwema  alipita  akawaona  asikari;  akaamuru  wapigwe  na 
baharia  wa  merikebu  ya  Sultani  wetu. 

Vipofu  wafupi.  Kiziwi  mgeni.  Kiroboto  mkubwa.  Vi- 
boko  wake.  Kifaru  mzima.  Kijakazi  mzuri.  Vijana  wazuri. 
Viziwi  wawivu  wanane.  Viboko  wazito  sita.  Viroboto  wale. 
Vijakazi  hawa.  Kiboko  yule  mkali.  Kipofu  amekufa. 
Nani  kipofu  huyu  ?  Vijakazi  wako  walitwaa  mwavuli  wangu. 
Ng'ombe  wamenona.  Punda  walishiba.  Ng'ombe  aliye- 
konda. 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 
(page  67) 

Malindi  mji  wa  kale  kuliko  Mvita.  Maneno  ya  waty 
wa  Mvita  sahihi  kuliko  maneno  ya  Unguja.  Watu  wabaau 


110  SWAHILI   EXERCISES:    KEY. 

wabaya  kuliko  nyama.  Mitende  mizuri  kuliko  minazi. 
Dawa  iliyo  chungu.  Joho  hii  nyeusi  kuliko  hii,  lakini  iliyo 
nyeusi  sana  ni  ile.  Mto  huu  mpana  kuliko  Rovuma. 
Mahali  pale  safi  kuliko  hapa  ?  Furaha  yangu  kamili  kuliko 
yako.  Hesabu  za  msimamizi  sahihi  kuliko  zile  za  mvuvi. 
Watumwa  werevu  kuliko  msimamizi,  wakamdanganya. 
Mzungu  mkali  kuliko  mwashi  akawapiga  watumwa  wote. 
Baruti  iliyo  pipani  kavu  kuiiko  sabuni  iliyo  kashani.  Mti 
huu  imara  kuliko  ule  uliotiwa  shimoni  jana.  Mtungi  huu 
umejaa  kuliko  ule.  Nyumba  ya  Abdallah  kubwa  kuliko 
yangu,  lakini  yangu  nzuri  kuliko  nyurnba  zote  nilizoziona. 
Njia  hii  ndefu  kuliko  ile  nyumbani  kwako,  lakini  iliyo  fupi 
yapita  shamba  lako.  Mti  upi  ulio  mgumu  ?  Jumbe  thaifu 
kuliko  wevi.  Ukuni  mwepesi  kuliko  ubau  mnene.  Ndizi 
hizi  nyekundu  na  tamu  kuliko  zako.  Kengele  yetu  iliyo 
ndogo  nzito  kuliko  yao  iliyo  kubwa,  Ndevu  ya  Abdallah 
bin  Ali  ndefu,  lakini  ile  ya  Suleman  ndefu  sana. 

TO  BE. 

(page  68) 

Chuo  kiko  mezanl  Mpishi  yuko  karibu,  Mbau  ziko 
merikebuni.  Wavuvi  wako  mtumbwini.  Mitumbwi  iko 
majini.  Magari  yako  njiani.  Machungwa  yako  pakachani. 
Watumwa  wengi  wako  mjini  mwako  ?  Wako.  Naliona 
merikebu  sita  jana,  ziko  wapi  sasa  ?  Ziko  kisiwani.  Iko 
mitumbwi  karibu  yao  ?  Iko  mitumbwi  saba  karibu  sana. 
Msimamizi  wetu  yuko  wapi  ?  Yuko  shambani.  Watumwa 
wako  pamojanawe?  Wako  asharini.  Nani  yuko?  Abd- 
allah yuko.  Yuko  wapi  Ali?  Yuko  nyumbani.  Mfalme 
yuko  nje. 

Mimi  niliye  mwema.  Wewe  uliye  mbaya.  Yeye  aliye 
thaifu.  Yeye  aliye  mvivu.  Sisi  tulio  wanana.  Ninyi  mlio 
wakali.  Jiwe  lililo  kubwa.  Nyumba  iliyo  ndogo.  Tende 
zilizo  tamu.  Mtu  aliye  mzee.  Mfalme  aliye  mlevi.  Ki- 
pande  kilicho  kidogo.  Kasha  lililo  zito.  Mishale  iliyo 
mikali.  Bithaa  zilizo  ghali. 


SWAHILI  EXERCISES:  KEY.  in 


69) 

Kitabu  kilichoko  raezani.  Mbau  zilizoko  merikebuni. 
Wavuvi  walioko  mtumbwini.  Mitumbwi  iliyoko  majini. 
Machungwa  yaliyoko  mitini.  Watumwa  walioko  mjini 
mwetu  watakimbia  wote,  wakiiona  bunduki  iliyoko  mkononi 
mwako.  Merikebu  zilizoko  kisiwani  zitauharibu  mji  ulioko 
upande  huu  wa  mto.  Jumbe  alioko  mjini  mwetu.  Miti 
iliyoko  njiani. 

(page  69) 

Abdallah  alikuwa  mfalme,  mimi  nalikuwa  mtumwa.  Wa- 
likuwa  mtu  mwema.  Alikuwa  mvuvi.  Walikuwa  watumwa 
wavivu.  Wazungu  walikuwa  watu  wakalL  Watu  wale 
walikuwa  weusi  wote.  Mwenyewe  alikuwa  mtu  wa  akili, 
wangine  walikuwa  wajinga. 

Watu  weusi  walikuwako  mwituni.  Mzungu  alikuwako 
mzinganL  Bunduki  yalikuwako  nyumbani.  Nyumba  yali- 
kuwako  mtoni,  mto  walikuwako  karibu  na  mlima.  Mlima 
walikuwako  kisiwana.  Kisiwa  chalikuwako  baharini.  Watu 
wengi  walikuwako  mjini,  lakini  watu  wachache  walikuwa  nje 
ya  nyumba. 

(page  70) 

Mfalme  alikuwako  nyumbani,  watu  wake  walikuwako 
mbali.  Mzungu  alikuwako  juu  ya  mwamba.  Mtumbwi 
walikuwako  karibu.  Naliona  watu  wawili  waliokuwako 
mlangoni  pa  nyumba,  karibu  na  mtende.  Mfalme  alisema, 
ulikuwa  mzee  zamani,  nikamwambia,  wewe  ulikuwa  mtoto  ? 
Akaniambia  nalikuwa  kijana.  Merikebu  zalikuwako  baha- 
rini, watu  walikuv/ako  mjini.  Watumwa  walikuwa  watu- 
mishi  wa  Mzungu.  Nilikuwako  mjini  nikaziona  nyumba 
za  kale  zilizokuwako.  Naliona  watu  wengi,  walikuwako 
njiani,  lakini  wale  wenzi  wetu  waliowaona  walikuwako  mwi- 
tuni, nao  haba.  Watu  wengi  walikuwako  na  mfalme.  Wa- 
chache walikimbia,  wale  waliokimbia  walikuwako  baadaye 
mjini  kwetu,  nikawaua  wote.  Makasha  makubwa  matano 
yalikuwako  nyumbani  mwangu  siku  nyingi. 

Watu  waliokuwako  mjini  waliogopa,  sisi  tuliokuwako 
nje  tukakimbia.  Mfalme  aliwaita  wavuvi  waliokuwako 


ii2  SWAHILI  EXERCISES:  KEY. 

mtumbwini.  Uliwaona  watu  waliokuwako  ?  Mitumbwi 
mingapi  iliyokuwako  imezama?  Mzungu  alikata  miti  yote 
iliyokuwako  shambani.  Mfalme  aliwaua  wote  waliokuwa 
watumwa  wetu.  Makasha  yalikuwako  kwangu  yalivunjwa 
na  wevi  waliokuwako  baadaye  mjini  kwenu.  Nyumba  zili- 
zokuwako  zimeanguka  zote.  Nilivinunua  vitabu  vyote  vili 
vyokuwako.  Alikileta  chuo  kilichokuwako  mezani  mwangu, 

IRREGULAR  VERBS. 
(page  71) 

Wevi  watano  waliyakwiba  makasha  yaliyo  kuwako  nyu- 
rabani  kwangu.  Bithaa  zilizokuwako  merikebuni  zalikwibwa 
na  wavuvi.  Wajakazi  walikwanza  kwimba.  Walikwimba 
nyimbo  nzuri  nyingi.  Jumbe  alikwenda  koga  mtoni.  Ndizi 
hazijaiva  bado,  zimekomaa  lakini  si  tamu.  Ulikuza  wa- 
tumwa wanne  mwenyewe.  Tutaioka  mikate  utakayoitaka 
njiani.  Fetha  zetu  zimekwisha,  hatuwezi  kununua  maboga 
yako.  Embe  zitakwisha  ukizila  sasa.  Aliyeniita  nani? 
Anayekwimba  nani  ?  Sijaisha  bado.  Utakwisha  lini  ? 
Usiibe  watu.  Endeni  mjini,  mkaite  watu  watano  waimbe 
nyimbo  nyumbani  kwangu.  Watu  wetu  wamekula  ndi/d 
zote,  hatukuza  hatta  moja.  Utakufa.  Atakuja  kwetu. 
Tutakula  nyama.  Nyama  imeliwa,  aliyopewa  nami.  Tule, 
tukanywe.  Usiku  utakuja  na  watumwa  watakula.  Sikuzote 
twanywa  maji  tu.  Jua  linakuchwa. 

TO  HAVE. 
(page  72) 

Nalitaka  kununua  nazi  zote  mfalme  alizokuwa  nazo, 
lakini  naona  alikuwa  nazo  nyingi  nisizozipata.  Nina  upa- 
nga,  nawe  una  mkuke  na  ngao,  tuogope  nini  ?  Mtu  akiwa 
na  fetha  atakuwa  mkuu.  Kama  mtu  hana  fetha  hata- 
kuwa  mkuu.  Nyumba  yangu  kubwa  haina  mlango. 
Sikuwa  na  nyumba  zamani,  sasa  ninazo  hizi  tatu.  Wevi 
walikwiba  killa  kitu  tulichokuwa  nacho.  Mzee  ana  vyuo 


SWAHILI  EXERCISES:  KEY.  113 

vya  thamani  vingi.  Nitanunua  vyuo  vyote  walivyo  navyo 
Wazungu.  Nalikuza  vitabu  vyote  nilivyokuwa  navyo  mwe- 
nyewe,  ilia  vile  ulivyonipa.  Ninavyo  sasa  nyumbani. 
Abdallah  akifa,  nitakuwa  na  fetha  nyingi.  Nitakuwa  nayo 
mail  utakayonipa.  Usiponipa  kitu,  sitakuwa  na  kitu.  Ali- 
jaribu  kuniua  nikampiga  kwa  upanga  niliokuwa  nao. 

(page  73) 

Hapana  mtu  nyumbani.  Hakuna  mtu  anayejua  kumshi- 
nda.  Hapana  kitu,  nje.  Nalitafuta  kisu  lakini  kisu  hapana, 
Naliona  upanga  mkononi  mwake,  nikatazama  tena,  hakuwa 
na  upanga,  hatta  sasa  hapana.  Palikuwa  na  mtu,  sasa 
hapana  mtu. 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 
(page  74) 

Sikuwa  nikienda  rnjini,  lakini  nitarudi  sasa.  Alikuwa 
akila.  Sikumwona,  alikuwa  amekwisha  kupita.  Mwivi 
alikuwa  amekwiba  fetha.  Ulikuwa  umekisoma  kitabu? 
Sikuwa  nimekisoma.  Nalikuwa  nikikitazama.  Wavuvi_wa- 
likuwako  baharini,  walikuwa  wameona  samaki  haba  nsiku. 
Vijana  walikuwa  wakilima  shamba  lao.  Alikuwa  ameu- 
funga  mlango.  Nalikuwa  nimewakata  vidole.  Nitakuwa 
nikikata  mitende  yao.  Alikuwa  akila  chakula  chake.  Ame- 
kwisha kula.  Walikuwa  wakiiba  nazi  shambani  kwangu. 
Watumwa  walikuwa  wakiniambia  habari  zote  za  wevi. 
Msimamizi  alikuwa  akienda,  lakini  vijakazi  walikuwa  wame- 
kimbia.  Nitakuwa  nikitoka  nyumbani.  Alikuwa  akiingia 
mlangoni.  Nalikuona,  ulikuwa  ukimpiga  kofi  mtwana 
wangu. 

DERIVATIVE  VERBS. 

(page  74) 

Kuombea.     Kuogea.     Kuletea.     Kujengea.     Kusetea. 
Kuponyea,      Kukokotea.      Kuotea.      Kuelezea.     Kuonea 


114  SWAHILI   EXERCISES:    KEY. 

Kutokea.  Kuondokea.  Kutwekea.  Kuchekea.  Kule- 
gezea.  Kukosea.  Kuwekea.  Kusemea.  Kupelekea 
Kunenea.  Kungojea.  Kuoshea.  Kuendea. 

Aliniombea.  Nalimletea  kitabu.  Walitujengea  ukuta. 
Nitakuponyea  mtumwa  wako.  Nalimwotea  mfalme.  Mzee 
alituelezea  sauti  tuliyoisikia.  Nakuonea  uovu.  Mahali 
tutakapotokea.  Nalimwondokea.  Twalimtwekea  mfalme 
bandera.  Mpishi  aliwawekea  watoto  chakula  kingi.  Nali- 
mngojea  siku  nyingi.  Nioshee  sahani  hizl  Aliiendea 
njia  hii. 

(P*&  75) 

Kupigia.  Kufikia.  Kuulizia.  Kuamkia.  Kuumia. 
Kuvunjia.  Kuitia.  Kukamatia.  Kugeukia.  Kupandia. 
Kukusanyia.  Kuvukia.  Kulimia.  Kukatia.  Kulindia. 
Kukania.  Kuchimbia.  Kuvutia.  Kufukuzia.  Kumwa- 
gia.  Kupungukia.  Kuishia.  Kukunjia.  Kupatia.  Ku- 
shukia.  Kufishia.  Kuachia,  Kutazamia.  Kutafutia. 
Kupimia.  Kulipia.  Kuimbia.  Kusikitikia.  Kusimamia. 
Kutupia,  Kufungia.  Kufutia. 

Nataka  unipigie  mtu  huyu.  Nitamwulizia  mpishi.  Ume- 
nivunjia  kisu  changu.  Sijui  nililoitiwa.  Wavu  unaokamatia 
nyama.  Wapagazi  walinigeukia.  Walinipandia.  Mfalme 
aliwakusanyia  watu  wake  wote.  Siuoni  mtumbwi  waliouvu- 
kia.  Tunamlimia  mfalme.  Nikatie  fimbo.  Alimkania 
jumbe  maneno,  aliyonifichia.  Sitakuchimbia.  Tufukuzie 
watumwa.  Wavuvi  walikuwa  wakitazamia  merikebu.  Ali- 
kataa  kunipimia  njia.  Wajakazi  walikuwa  wakimwimbia 
msimamizi  shambani  kwako,  naye  alikuwa  akiwalipia  fetha. 
Nakusikitikia.  Mtupia  mkuke.  Wafungia  mlango.  Jumbe 
aliimbiwa  na  watu  wetu.  Nalitupiwa  mawe  na  vijana. 
Naliachiwa  shamba.  Nalisikitikiwa. 


75) 

Kusumbulia.  Kuzalia,  Kuchukulia.  Kuchagulia. 
Kupungulia.  Kusikilia.  Kuzuilia.  Kuamulia.  Kulilia. 
Kununulia.  Kupindulia,  Kutilia.  Kuvalia.  Kutolea, 


SWAHILI  EXERCISES:  KEY.  115 

Kupokelea.  Kukatalia.  Kukalia.  Kusugulia.  Kukimbilia. 
Kunyolea.  Kupasulia.  Kutwalia.  Kuvulia.  Kurarulia. 
Kufunulia.  Kutembelea. 

(page  76) 

Tuutembelee  mjini.  Tufungulie  mlango.  Mfunulie 
mpishi  chungu.  Nalimvulia  viatu  vyangu.  Wamenitwalia 
watoto  wangu.  Nipe  shoka  nipasulie  mbau.  Uko  wapi 
wembe  nilionyolewa.  Wataka  mji  waukimbilie.  Tusugulie 
meza.  Wafalme  hawakumkatalia  haja  yake.  Mtu  wa 
kwanza  alimpokelea  wa  pili  fetha.  Nimekutolea  fetha. 
Miti  iraeng'olewa  yote.  Nimeng'olewa  miti  yangu  yote. 
Aliinuliwa.  Mtumwa  alimchinjia  nyama  jumbe  wake. 
Nifungulie  mlango. 

(page  76) 

Kubatilia,  kubatiliwa.  Kushtakia,  kushtakiwa,  Kukubalia, 
kukubaliwa.  Kubadilia,  kubadiliwa.  Kuhubiria,  kuhubiri- 
wa.  Kujibia,  kujibiwa,  Kuwasilia,  kuwasiliwa.  Kuhimi- 
lia,  kuhimiliwa.  Kusihia,  kusihiwa.  Kusadikia,  kusadikiwa. 
Kuaminia,  kuaminiwa,  Kujelidia,  kujelidiwa.  Kubarikia, 
kubarikiwa.  Kukirithia,  kukirithiwa.  Kuzabunia,  kuza- 
buniwa.  Kutakabathia,  kutakabathiwa.  Kudirikia,  kudiri- 
kiwa.  Kuathibia,  kuathibiwa.  Kuhitaria,  kuhitariwa.  Ku- 
tahiria,  kutahiriwa.  Kushawishia,  kushawishiwa,  Kukaribia, 
kukaribiwa.  Kufarijia,  kufarijiwa.  Kuamuria,  kuamuriwa. 
Kuhitimia,  kuhitimiwa.  Kusetiria,  kusetiriwa.  Kukiria, 
kukiriwa.  Kutumainia,  kutumainiwa.  Kufikiria,  kufikiriwa. 
Kusahihia,  kusahihiwa.  Kuwakifia,  kuwakifiwa.  Kuta- 
mania,  kutamaniwa.  Kuhulukia,  kuhulukiwa.  Kusulibia, 
kusulibiwa.  Kuvinjaria,  kuvinjariwa.  Kulaania,  kulaaniwa. 
Kuthubutia,  kuthubutiwa.  Kufarikia,  kuferikiwa.  Kutha- 
limia,  kuthalimiwa.  Kufawitia,  kufawitiwa.  Kuhinia,  ku- 
hiniwa,  Kuuzulia,  kuuzuliwa.  Kustahilia,  kustahUiwa. 
Kufathilia,  kufathiliwa.  Kutharaulia,  kutharauliwa.  Kuasia, 
kuasiwa.  Kustarehea,  kustarehewa.  Kuhusudia,  kuhusu- 
diwa.  Kutanafusia,  kutanafusiwa.  Kuketia,  kuketiwa. 


n6  SWAHILI  EXERCISES:  KEY. 

Kustahimilia,  kustahimiliwa.  Kuhakikia,  kuhakikiwa.  Ku- 
sayilia,  kusayiliwa.  Kutahidia,  kutahidiwa.  Kufasiria,  ku- 
fasiriwa.  Kubainia,  kubainiwa.  Kufurahia,  kufurahiwa. 
Kusitawia,  kusitawiwa.  Kutabiria,  kutabiriwa.  Kubashiria, 
kubashiriwa.  Kusahaulia,  kusahauliwa.  Kukabithia,  kuka- 
bithiwa.  Kunathiria,  kunathiriwa.  Kumilikia,  kumilikiwa. 
Kuthania,  kuthaniwa.  Kuhamia,  kuhamiwa.  Kuthuria, 
kuthuriwa.  Kuaunia,  kuauniwa.  Kuarifia,  kuarifiwa.  Ku- 
hifathia,  kuhifathiwa.  Kurudia,  kurudiwa.  Kutuhumia, 
kutuhumiwa.  Kugharimia,  kugharimiwa.  Kufuturia,  ku- 
futuriwa.  Kusakifia,  kusakifiwa.  Kurissimia,  kurissimiwa. 
Kuhalifia,  kuhalifiwa.  Kukabilia,  kukabiliwa.  Kusamehea, 
kusamehewa.  Kusubiria,  kusubiriwa.  Kudumia,  kudumi- 
wa,  Kulaabia,  kulaabiwa.  Kuabudia,  kuabudiwa.  Kuhu- 
tubia,  kuhutubiwa.  Kuafia,  kuafiwa.  Kukirihia,  kukirihiwa. 
Kusujudia,  kusujudiwa.  Kufidia,  kufidiwa.  Kutubia,  ku- 
tubiwa.  Kushutumia,  kushutumnva,  Kuhuia,  kuhuiwa. 
Kutilifia,  kutilifiwa.  Kukinaia,  kukinaiwa.  Kufilisia,  ku- 
filisiwa.  Kufitinia,  kufitiniwa.  Kusakia,  kusakiwa.  Ku- 
daia,  kudaiwa,  Kuruzukia,  kuruzukiwa.  Kuthaminia, 
kuthamaniwa.  Kuhadithia,  kuhadithiwa.  Kushuhudia, 
kushuhudiwa.  Kusafiria,  kusafiriwa.  Kutadarikia,  kuta- 
darikiwa.  Kujeruhia,  kujeruhiwa.  Kustaajabia,  kustaa- 
jabiwa. 

77) 


Shoka  la  kupasulia  kuni.  Neno  la  kumjibia.  Fimbo  ya 
kupigia  mbwa.  Upepo  ulizivumia  mbali  karatasi.  Watu 
wataka  miti  ya  kujengea.  Sioni  mtu  wa  kuitia.  Nina 
wapagazi  wa  kunichukulia.  Naona  mahali  pa  kupandia. 
Chungu  cha  kupikia  viazi.  Walikatia  mbali  mlingote. 
Watumwa  wanayo  majembe  ya  kulimia.  Kamba  ya  kuvutia 
garl  Jumbe  alivvafukuzia  mbali  adui  wake.  Sioni  maneno 
ya  kuelezea  maana  yangu.  Uko  wapi  mkufu  wa  kumfungia? 
Ndege  walirukia  mbali.  Nipe  misomari  mirefu  ya  kuzi- 
fungia  mbau.  Tuwaulie  mbali  wote.  Sukumia  mbali  jiwe. 
Kitanda  cha  kupumzikia,  Lete  maji  ye  kuzioshea  sahani. 
Nina  nguo  ya  kuzifutia  baadaye. 


SWAHILI    EXERCISES  :    KEY.  1 1 7 

(page  78) 

Kushtakiana.  Kujibiana.  Kusumbuana.  Kuitana. 
Kudanganyana.  Kuponyana.  Kulindana.  Kuogopana. 
Kulishana.  Kuonana.  Kusameheana.  Kuchuk'.ana. 
Kusayidiana.  Kuagana.  Kukutana.  Kupendezana. 
Kusifiana.  Kutharauliana.  Kufundishana.  Kuambiana. 

(page  78) 

Kufutika.  Kuosheka.  Kutumika.  Kufunuka.  Kuta- 
tuka.  Kupasuka.  Kurawagika.  Kutikisika.  Kushoneka. 
Kutafutika.  Kutharaulika.  Kutawanyika.  Kuvutika. 
Kuinuka.  Kushuka.  Kupitika.  Kusagika.  Kusahaulika. 
Kukunjika.  Kununulika.  Kukubalika.  Kusumbuka. 

(page  79) 

1.  Kuchukiza.     Kujaza.     Kuzoeza.     Kufanyiza.     Kuin- 
giza.      Kugombeza.      Kukweza.      Kushangaza.      Kutuliza. 
Kuchukuza.     Kugeuza,     Kueleza.      Kuokoza.     Kukataza. 
Kukimbiza.      Kulekeza.      Kutimiza.      Kupenyeza.      Kure- 
geza.     Kukuza.     Kupoza.     Kusikiliza.     Kupoteza.     Ku- 
jongeza.     Kusogeza.     Kulipiza,     Kutegemeza.     Kueneza. 
Kukwaza.     Kuliza, 

2.  Kuwezesha.     Kujumlisha.     Kubadilisha.     Kukaribi- 
sha.     Kupandisha.      Kuinamisha.      Kupofusha.      Kuvumi- 
sha.      Kukosesha.      Kusumbusha.      Kupatanisha.      Kuko- 
mesha.     Kukutanisha.     Kulingahisha.      Kusulibisha.     Ku- 
furahisha.     Kupiganisha.     Kushibisha.      Kukopesha.     Ku- 
rudisha.     Kuinamisha.    Kukwamisha,    Kuzibisha.    Kuthu- 
butisha.     Kutatanisha.     Kuwasilisha.     Kustarehesha,    Ku- 
thanisha.     Kusafirisha.     Kutaajabisha. 

3.  Kuepusha.       Kutesa.       Kutaabisha.       Kuondosha. 
Kuamsha.     Kupofusha.     Kuchemsha.    Kutakasa.     Kuvu- 
sha.      Kuokosa.       Kuchesha.       Kukausha.      Kuangusha. 
Kukumbusha.     Kuwasha.     Kurusha.     Kunyosha.     Kutiki- 
sa.     Kufingirisha.     Kutosa.     Kukasirisha.     Kuzungusha. 


nS  SWAHILI  EXERCISES:  KEY. 

Kazi  yetu  imekwisha.  Sasa  twajua  kuandika  Kiswahili 
karaa  mtu  aliyezaliwa  katika  Unguja.  Watu  watatutaajabia. 
Mtu  akituuliza  maulizo  twajua  maneno  yaliyo  sahihi  ya 
kumjibia. 


THE  ENDk 


Bt  WaLUM  CtOWKS  ASP  »ON3,   LIMITED,   LOKDOS   AND  BlCCtlU. 


•i 


LID  unit  i 


. 
'•» 


MAY  .^  i  ?ooe 

' 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


A     000  568  880     9